JP6511026B2 - Gaming machine - Google Patents

Description

  The present invention relates to a gaming machine which executes a game based on establishment of a start condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result.

  Conventionally, there is a pachinko machine as a representative example of a game machine. In this pachinko machine, the game is executed based on the game ball winning on the starting opening provided in the game area, and when the result of the game is a special result, it becomes a special gaming state in which the special fluctuation winning device is opened. It is like that. The game is controlled by the main control board, and based on a command from the main control board, the display control board performs effect display in which a plurality of identification information (such as symbols and symbols) are variably displayed corresponding to the game on the display device. It has become.

  The main control board transmits a stop command to the display control board when deriving the result in the game, and the display control board stops fluctuating display of the identification information based on the symbol stop command, and The display corresponding to the result is made. In addition, there is also known a gaming machine which waits while displaying identification information in a swinging manner while the display control board is waiting to receive a symbol stop command without being able to receive a symbol stop command at a scheduled time. (See, for example, Patent Document 1).

JP, 2001-673, A

  However, in the gaming machine of Patent Document 1, a situation such as the case where the next game is started without the display control board being able to receive the symbol stop command is not assumed, and such a situation arises when it occurs There is a risk that problems will occur and the interest of the game may be reduced. An object of the present invention is to prevent a decrease in the interest of a game.

In order to solve the above problems, the invention according to claim 1 is:
In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
And an effect control means for displaying a decoration game in which identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the game based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means
At the start of the game, start information including information on the variation time of the decoration game is transmitted to the effect control means.
Stop information is sent to the effect control means when the result of the game is derived, and the standby information is sent to the effect control means when the game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied. Configured to send,
The effect control means is
Starting the decoration game based on the reception of the start information;
Configured to stop and display a result in the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information;
It is configured to set the execution mode of the decoration game so that the identification information is temporarily stopped before the end of the fluctuation time based on the start information.
When the start information of the next game following the previous game is received after the start information corresponding to the previous game is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game, Displaying the result of the decoration game corresponding to the result of the previous game in the decoration game for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the start information of the next game;
In one game, the difference between the fluctuation time of the decoration game corresponding to the game and the time from the start of the decoration game to the state where the identification information is temporarily stopped is twice the predetermined time. The execution mode can be set so that the above time is reached,
When the standby information is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game after receiving the start information corresponding to the previous game, the decoration game is performed for a predetermined time from the reception of the standby information. And displaying the result of the previous game in a stopped state.

  According to the present invention, it is possible to prevent a decrease in the interest of the game.

It is the perspective view which looked at the game machine of one embodiment of the present invention from the front side. It is a front view of a game board. It is an expansion explanatory view showing the details of a collective display. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a block diagram showing an example of composition of a control system of a game machine. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining main processing. It is a flowchart explaining a checksum calculation process. It is a flowchart explaining an initial value random number update process. It is a flow chart explaining timer interrupt processing. It is a flowchart explaining input processing. It is a flow chart explaining switch reading processing. It is a flowchart explaining an output process. It is a flowchart explaining a payment command transmission process. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 1. It is a flowchart explaining the random number update process 2. It is a flowchart explaining a winning a prize mouth switch / state monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining a fraud & prize monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a winning number counter update process. It is a flow chart explaining game machine state check processing. It is a flowchart explaining a payment busy signal check process. It is a flowchart explaining special figure game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a starting opening switch monitoring process. It is a flow chart explaining hard random number acquisition processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure starting opening switch common processing. It is a flowchart explaining the special figure reservation information determination processing. It is a flowchart explaining a special winning opening switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining special processing usual processing. It is a flow chart explaining special processing usual processing shift setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 change start processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 1 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit flag 2 setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit judging processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 1 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining special drawing information setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change pattern setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining change start information setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting process (special figure 1) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing (special figure 2) during special figure fluctuation. It is a flow chart explaining processing during a special figure change. It is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during a special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flowchart explaining a process during special figure display. It is a flow chart explaining high probability change frequency number update processing. It is a flowchart explaining a production mode information check process. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 1 during fan fare / interval. FIG. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1; FIG. It is a flow chart explaining processing during fanfare / interval. It is a flow chart explaining processing shift setting processing during special winning opening open. It is a flow chart explaining processing during big winning a prize opening. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth residual ball processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big winning a prize mouth remaining ball processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart for describing a process transfer setting process 2 during fan fare / interval. FIG. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end processing shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining a big hit end process. It is a flow chart explaining big hit end setting processing 1. It is a flowchart explaining the big hit end setting processing 2. FIG. 17 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 2; (A) is a flowchart explaining the small hit fanfare medium process, (b) is a flowchart explaining the small hit medium process transfer setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a small hit middle process. It is a flowchart explaining small hit operation shift setting processing. It is a flowchart explaining small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing. (A) is a flowchart explaining small hit residual ball processing, (b) is a flow chart explaining small hitting end processing shift setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining small hit end processing. FIG. 18 is a flowchart illustrating special processing ordinary processing shift setting processing 3; It is a flowchart explaining a production | presentation command setting process. It is a flowchart explaining symbol change control processing. It is a flowchart explaining distribution processing. It is a flowchart explaining 2 byte distribution processing. It is a flow chart explaining common drawing game processing. It is a flowchart explaining a gate switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a Fuden prize winning switch monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining a common drawing usual processing. FIG. 17 is a flowchart for explaining a general-purpose process shift setting process 1; FIG. It is a flowchart explaining the processing transfer setting processing during common drawing fluctuation. (A) is a flowchart explaining the processing during the common drawing fluctuation, (b) is a flowchart explaining the processing shift setting processing during the common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process in common drawing display. It is a flowchart explaining a process transfer setting process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a process during a common drawing. It is a flowchart explaining a power transmission operation shift setting process. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the routine electric bulb remaining ball processing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing shift setting process per common drawing. (A) is a flow chart for explaining the end processing per common drawing, (b) is a flow chart for explaining the common processing shift processing 2 for common processing. It is a flowchart explaining segment LED edit processing. It is a figure explaining the display mode in a pending | holding indicator, and the content of a pending | holding display table. It is a flowchart explaining a magnet fraud monitoring process. It is a flowchart explaining board radio wave fraud monitoring processing. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flowchart explaining an external information edit process. It is a flow chart explaining main prize ball signal edit processing. It is a flow chart explaining starting opening signal editing processing. It is a flowchart explaining the main processing in a production control device. It is a flowchart explaining a reception command check process. It is a flowchart explaining a received command analysis process. It is a flowchart explaining a one-shot system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a symbol system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining variable system command processing. It is a flow chart explaining change production setting processing. It is a flow chart explaining big hit system command processing. It is a flowchart explaining a customer waiting demo setting process. It is a flowchart explaining a special figure reservation information setting process. It is a figure explaining the structure and display mode of a sub information display apparatus. It is a flowchart explaining a sub information display apparatus control process. It is a figure explaining the decoration display in case the number of starting memory increases. It is a figure explaining the decoration display in case the number of starting memory decreases. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of a decoration special figure change display game. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping a stop command. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping a stop command. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping a stop command. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping a stop command. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping a stop command. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping a stop command. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of the decoration special figure change display game in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode of the decoration special figure change display game in the 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping the stop command in a 1st modification. It is a figure explaining an example of the execution mode at the time of dropping the stop command in a 1st modification.

First Embodiment
Hereinafter, preferred embodiments of the present invention will be described based on the drawings. FIG. 1 is an explanatory view of a gaming machine according to an embodiment of the present invention.

  The gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment includes a front frame 12, and the front frame 12 is assembled to an outer frame (support frame) 11 so as to be capable of opening and closing. The game board 30 (see FIG. 2) is housed in a housing portion (not shown) formed on the front side of the front frame 12. Further, a glass frame 15 (transparent plate holding frame) provided with a cover glass (transparent member) 14 for covering the front surface of the game board 30 is attached to the front frame (main body frame) 12.

  In addition, lamps and LEDs are internally incorporated on the left and right sides of the glass frame 15 for decoration or effect, and notification when an abnormality occurs (for example, when a delivery abnormality occurs, the lamp, LED, etc. has an abnormality notification color (for example, red , And a speaker (upper speaker) 19a for emitting a sound (for example, a sound effect). Furthermore, a speaker (lower speaker) 19 b is also provided at the lower part of the front frame 12. Further, when an abnormality occurs, the abnormal content is notified by voice from the speaker (upper speaker) 19a and the speaker (lower speaker) 19b. Note that a lamp for notifying a dispensing abnormality may be provided on a predetermined portion of the glass frame 15.

In the lower part of the front frame 12, an upper plate 21 (reserved plate) for supplying gaming balls to a bat firing device (not shown) and gaming balls paid out from a payout unit provided on the back side of the gaming machine 10 There are provided an upper flat ball outlet 22 which flows out, a lower tray (a tray) 23 for storing gaming balls dispensed in a state where the upper tray 21 is full, an operation unit 24 of a hitting launch device, and the like. Further, at the upper edge portion of the upper tray 21, a presentation button 25 incorporating a presentation button switch 25a for receiving a pressing operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the upper surface (pressing surface) of the effect button 25, a touch panel 29 for receiving a touch operation input from the player is provided. Further, on the lower right side of the front frame 12, a key hole 26 for inserting a key for opening or locking the front frame 12 or the glass frame 15 is provided.
Although the touch panel 29 is provided integrally with the effect button 25 in the present embodiment, the touch panel 29 may be separate from the effect button 25. For example, a sub display device is provided in the vicinity of the effect button 25 A touch panel 29 may be provided on the display surface of the sub display device.

  Also, to the right of the effect button 25, the ball lending button 27 operated when the player receives a ball loan from the adjacent ball lending machine, and the discharge button operated to eject the prepaid card from the card unit of the ball lending machine 28, a balance display unit (not shown) for displaying the balance of the prepaid card, and the like are provided. In the gaming machine 10 of this embodiment, when the player rotates the operation unit 24, the ball striking device is supplied from the upper plate 21 to the gaming ball 32 toward the gaming area 32 on the front of the gaming board 30. To fire. In addition, the player operates the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29 to perform an operation or the like in which the player operates in the variable display game (the decoration special view variable display game) on the display device 41 (see FIG. 2). It can be carried out.

  Next, an example of the game board 30 will be described with reference to FIG. FIG. 2 is a front view of the game board 30 of the present embodiment.

  A substantially circular game area 32 surrounded by a guide rail 31 is formed on the surface of the game board 30. The game area 32 is surrounded by resin side cases 33 and guide rails 31 provided at four corners of the game board 30, respectively. In the game area 32, a center case (game effect structure) 40 provided with a display device 41 substantially at the center is arranged. The display device 41 is attached to a recess provided in the center case 40 at a position recessed from the front surface of the center case 40. That is, the center case 40 is formed so as to surround the display area of the display device 41 and to project forward than the display surface of the display device 41 to make it difficult for the game ball to jump from the surrounding game area 32.

  The display device 41 (variable display device) is configured of, for example, a device having a display screen such as an LCD (liquid crystal display) or a CRT (brown tube). In the area (display area) where an image of the display screen can be displayed, information related to the game such as a plurality of identification information (special symbol), a character producing a special view variation display game, a background image enhancing a rendering effect . On the display screen of the display device 41, a plurality of special symbols assigned as identification information are variably displayed (variable display), and a decorative special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game is performed. In addition, an image (for example, a big hit display image, a fanfare display image, an ending display image, and the like) for effect based on the progress of the game is displayed on the display screen.

  In addition, the center case 40 is provided with a board effect device 44 forming a movable effect device for producing effects of a game including a special view variation display game by the movable effect member operating. As the board effect apparatus 44, a first board effect apparatus 44a is provided below the center case 40. The first board effect device 44a is provided with a movable effect member having a hexagonal column shape, is operable upward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2, and can operate in a range indicated by a broken line. Further, a second board effect device 44 b is provided on the left and right portions of the center case 40 as the board effect device 44. The second board effect device 44b includes a plate-like movable effect member, is operable from the initial position shown in FIG. 2 toward the center of the display device 41, and can operate within the range indicated by a broken line. In addition, a third board effect device 44 c is provided on the top of the center case 40 as the board effect device 44. The third board effect device 44c is provided with a circular movable effect member, is operable downward from the initial position shown in FIG. 2, and can operate within the range indicated by a dotted line.

  Here, the first board rendering device 44a and the third board rendering device 44c overlap with each other in a part of the operation range in the vicinity of the central portion of the display device and interfere with each other. . Further, since the second board rendering device 44 b does not overlap with the other board rendering device 44 without interfering with the other board rendering device 44, the second board rendering device 44 b does not collide even if it operates simultaneously with the other board rendering device 44.

  In the lower left portion of the center case 40, a sub-display for displaying a fourth symbol to execute the decorative special view variable display game separately from the decorative special view variable display game displayed on the display device 41 and displaying the number of starting memories An information display device 90 is provided.

  The sub information display device 90 is configured by a single light emitting unit forming a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game. A second sub formed of a sub game display portion 91 and a single light emitting portion forming a sub game display portion for displaying a fourth pattern for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game And a game display unit 92. Furthermore, a first sub-display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units, and a second special view variation display game by two light emission units And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to do.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, a display indicating that the corresponding special view variation display game is being displayed in a variable manner, and a display indicating the result are extinguished, blinked, or lit of the light emitting unit Can be displayed. In addition, the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 have the numbers of the first start storage (special figure 1 suspension) and the second start storage (special figure 2 suspension) turned off of the two light emitting units, respectively. It can be displayed by blinking or lighting.

  By providing the sub information display device 90 separately from the display device 41, the fourth symbol is displayed on the display device 41 without occupying the display region of the display device 41, and the display region is effectively utilized. be able to. The sub information display device 90 is provided outside the operation range of the first board rendering device 44a, the second board rendering device 44b, and the third board rendering device 44c, and the sub information display device 90 is in the process of operating these It is made that it is not covered.

On the lower right side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, a normal symbol start gate 34 (common view start gate, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the common view variation display game is provided. The game ball that has won the common drawing start gate 34 is detected by the gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4).
Further, three general winning openings 35 are disposed on the lower left side of the center case 40 in the game area 32, and one general winning area is on the lower right side of the center case 40 and below the common view starting gate 34. A mouth 35 is arranged. The game ball that has won the general winning opening 35 is detected by the winning opening switch 35a (see FIG. 4).

  Further, below the center case 40 in the game area 32, a start winning opening 36 (a first start winning opening, a start area, an inflow area) for giving a start condition of the first special view variation display game is provided. The game ball having won the start winning opening 36 is detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a (see FIG. 4).

Further, immediately below the start winning opening 36, a normal change winning device 37 (second start winning opening, start area, inflow area) for giving a start condition of the second special figure change display game is provided.
The normal fluctuation winning device 37 is provided with a movable member 37b which can be opened to allow the game ball to easily flow in by opening in the direction in which the upper end side falls to the front side, and the movable member 37b is always A closed closed state (a disadvantageous state for the player) to which the game ball can not flow is maintained. Then, when the result of the common drawing variation display game becomes a predetermined stop display mode, the game ball easily flows into the normal fluctuation winning device 37 by the common power solenoid 37c (see FIG. 4) as a drive device. It can be changed to a state (a state advantageous to the player). The game ball that has won the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is detected by the starting opening 2 switch 37a (see FIG. 4). In addition, it is possible to be able to win even when the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the closed state, and in the closed state, it may be possible to win rather than the open state.
In addition, below the normal fluctuation winning device 37, an out port 30a is provided for collecting gaming balls that did not win a prize.

Furthermore, a special variation that can be converted into a non-accepting state and an easy-accepting state according to the result of the special view variation display game on the lower side of the center case 40 in the gaming area 32 and to the right of the start winning opening 36. A winning device (big winning opening) 38 is disposed.
The special variation winning device 38 has an attacker-type opening / closing door 38c which can be opened by turning in the direction in which the upper end falls down to the front, and as a result of the special figure variation display game as an auxiliary game The state of closing the big winning opening (blocked state which is disadvantageous for the player) is converted into the opened state (which is advantageous for the player). That is, the special variation winning device 38 has, for example, a special winning opening which is opened and closed by an open / close door 38c driven by a large winning opening solenoid 38b (see FIG. 4) as a drive device. During the state, the game ball is made easy to flow into the big winning hole by converting the big winning hole from the closed state to the open state, and the player is given a predetermined gaming value (prize ball). It has become. In the inside of the special winning opening (winning area), a special winning opening switch (count switch) 38a (see FIG. 4) is disposed as a detecting means for detecting the gaming ball having entered the special winning opening. . In the gaming machine of the present embodiment, two large winning opening switches 38a are provided, and the gaming balls having flowed into the large winning openings are detected by any of the large winning openings switches 38a. As described above, by providing a plurality of large winning opening switch 38a, it is possible to quickly detect the game ball flowing into the large winning opening.

In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, in the gaming area 32 where the gaming balls flow down, the area on the left of the center case 40 is taken as the left gaming area, and the area on the right of the center case 40 is taken as the right gaming area. ing. Then, the player adjusts the power and shoots the game ball to the left side game area (so-called left strike) to aim for winning in the start winning opening 36 and fires the game ball to the right side game area (so-called It is possible to aim for winning in the common drawing starting gate 34, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the special fluctuation winning device 38 by right-handing.
Here, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a flow path forming member 42 attached to the right end portion of the center case 40 is disposed at a position corresponding to the right gaming area, and is discharged to the right gaming area. The gaming ball thus formed is configured to pass through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42. In addition, since the material of at least the front surface of the flow path forming member 42 is made of a material that allows the game balls passing through the flow path formed by the flow path forming member 42 to be visible from the outside, The game ball passing through the flow path formed by the forming member 42 (that is, the game ball flowing down the right play area) can be viewed through the flow path forming member 42 from the front of the flow path forming member 42 .

  In addition, on the outside of the game area 32 (here, in the lower right part of the game board 30), the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game and the common view start gate 34 making the special view change display game. A collective display device 50 is provided which displays a common drawing variation display game triggered by winning and various information.

  As shown in FIG. 3, the batch display device 50 has a configuration in which a plurality of light emitting units including LEDs as light emitting sources are arranged in a matrix, and the light emitting units can independently set the lighting mode. Also, the player can visually recognize the lighting mode of each light emitting unit. In the diagram for explaining the collective display device 50, the symbols D1 to D32 displayed on the respective light emitting parts and the broken lines surrounding the luminous parts are displayed for the sake of explanation and are not displayed on the actual collective display device 50. . Further, the light source is not limited to the LED but may be a lamp. Furthermore, each light emitting unit may be configured by a liquid crystal display device, an EL display device, or the like.

  A special view 1 display 51 (D1 to D8) for displaying a first special view variation display game and a special view 2 display 52 for displaying a second special view variation display game (D17 to D26) are displayed on the collective display device 50. And a common drawing indicator 53 (D27 to D30) for displaying a common drawing variation display game. In addition, the special figure 1 reservation indicator 54 (D9, D10) which shows the number of the 1st starting memory which is the right to execute the 1st special figure fluctuation indicator game, the 2nd special figure fluctuation indicator game which is the right which is executed 2 special display 2 reserve display 55 (D11, D12) showing the number of start storage, common view reserve display 56 (D31, D32) showing the number of common view start storage which is the right to execute the common view variation display game Is provided.

  Furthermore, a first gaming status display unit (first gaming status indicator, right strike notification unit) 57 (D13) that informs the collective display device 50 that the game state is more advantageous to hit the right than to hit the left. ), The second game status display unit (second game status indicator, time saving status indicator) 58 (D14) that lights up when time saving status occurs and reports time saving status, the number of rounds at big hit (special variation winning device) A round display unit 60 (D15, D16) for displaying the number of opening and closing 38) is provided. The collective display device 50 may be further provided with a display unit (display) or the like that lights up when a big hit occurs and notifies of the occurrence of the big hit. In addition, a third gaming state display unit (third gaming state) displays that the probability state of the big hit is a high probability state when the gaming machine 10 is powered on, at a position where the player can visually recognize on the gaming board 30 Although the display unit and the probability state display unit are provided, they may be provided in the collective display device 50.

  In the special figure 1 display 51, during the variation time of the first special figure variation display game, the special figure 1 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the first special view variation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the first special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns displayed in the special figure 1 in-motion display and the lighting pattern displayed as the result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the first special figure variation display game.

  In the special figure 2 display 52, during the variation time of the second special figure variation display game, the special figure 2 variation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the variation time of the second special view variation display game is ended, the lighting pattern (resulting mode) corresponding to the result of the second special view variation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the special figure 2 fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (special figure, special symbol) for displaying the second special figure variation display game.

In the common drawing indicator 53, during the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing fluctuation display is repeatedly performed in which a plurality of predetermined lighting patterns are displayed in a predetermined order. Then, when the fluctuation time of the common drawing fluctuation display game ends, the lighting pattern (resulting aspect) according to the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed. Each of the lighting patterns to be displayed in the general drawing fluctuating display and the lighting pattern to be displayed as a result aspect form identification information (common drawing, normal symbol) for displaying the common drawing fluctuation display game.
The details of the special figure 1 display on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display on the special view 2 display 52, and the display on the common view display 53 will be described later.

  The special view 1 suspension display 54 displays the number of first start memories (first suspension number), which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game, by turning off, flashing, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The special view 2 reserve display 55 displays the number of the second start storage (second reserve number), which is the right to execute the second special view variation display game, by turning off, blinking, or lighting the plurality of light emitting units. The common drawing reserve display 56 displays the number of common drawing start memories (the number of common drawing reservations) which is the right to execute the common drawing variation display game by turning off, blinking and lighting the plurality of light emitting parts.

  The first gaming state display unit (right-handed notification unit) 57 turns off the lamp when the game state in which the left-handed game is more advantageous for the player than the right-handed game (normally hit), and turns the lamp off. If the player is in the game state advantageous to the player (right strike), the lamp is turned on.

  In the case of the normal gaming state where the time saving state is not occurring (when the fluctuation time shortening function is not activated), the second gaming state display unit (time shortening state notifying unit) 58 turns off the lamp and the time saving state occurs. If it is (when the fluctuation time reduction function is activated), the lamp is turned on.

  The round display unit 60 turns off all the light emitting units when not in the special game state, and sets the lighting mode corresponding to the number of rounds selected according to the special result during the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, only D15 is turned on when the selected round number is "4", and only D16 is turned on when the selected round number is "16". The special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, the round display unit 60, etc. may be configured by a 7-segment display.

FIG. 4 is a block diagram of a control system of the pachinko gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment.
The gaming machine 10 is provided with a gaming control apparatus 100, and the gaming control apparatus 100 is a main control apparatus (main substrate) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and a gaming microcomputer 111 (hereinafter referred to as a gaming microcomputer). And an input unit 120 having an input port, an output unit 130 having an output port and a driver, and a data bus 140 for connecting the CPU unit 110, the input unit 120, and the output unit 130. .

  The CPU unit 110 includes a gaming microcomputer (CPU) 111 called an amusement chip (IC) and an oscillator such as a crystal oscillator, and serves as a reference clock for the CPU operating clock or timer interrupt and a random number generation circuit. An oscillator circuit (crystal oscillator) 113 or the like is generated. The game control apparatus 100 and electronic components such as a solenoid and a motor driven by the game control apparatus 100 are supplied with a DC voltage of a predetermined level such as DC 32 V, DC 12 V, DC 5 V generated by the power supply apparatus 400 to be operable Be done.

  The power supply apparatus 400 is a normal power supply having an AC-DC converter that generates the DC voltage of 32 V from an AC power supply of 24 V and a DC-DC converter that generates DC voltages of 12 V and 5 V lower than DC voltage of 32 V. A power failure monitoring signal for notifying the game control device 100 of the occurrence and recovery of a power failure, having a backup power supply unit 420 for supplying a power supply voltage to the RAM in the gaming microcomputer 111 at power failure and a power failure monitoring circuit. And a control signal generation unit 430 that generates and outputs a control signal such as a reset signal.

  In this embodiment, the power supply 400 is configured separately from the game control apparatus 100, but the backup power supply 420 and the control signal generator 430 are integrated on a separate board or with the game control 100, ie, main It may be configured to be provided on a substrate. Since the game board 30 and the game control apparatus 100 are targets of replacement at the time of model change, as in the present embodiment, the backup power supply unit 420 and the control signal generation unit 430 are mounted on a substrate different from the power supply 400 Can be removed from the target of replacement and cost reduction can be achieved.

  The backup power supply unit 420 can be configured of one large-capacity capacitor such as an electrolytic capacitor. The backup power supply is supplied to the gaming microcomputer 111 (particularly the built-in RAM) of the gaming control apparatus 100, and data stored in the RAM is held even during a power failure or even after the power is shut off. That is, the game control means 100 is a backup storage means capable of holding data stored even when the power is shut off. Then, when power is restored, control can be resumed based on the data held by the backup storage means. The control signal generation unit 430 monitors, for example, the voltage of 32 V generated by the normal power supply unit 410, detects the occurrence of a power failure when it falls below 17 V, for example, and changes the power failure monitoring signal. Output Also, at the time of power on or recovery from a power failure, a reset signal is output after a predetermined time has elapsed from that time.

  In addition, the game control device 100 is provided with a RAM initialization switch 112. When the RAM initialization switch 112 is operated, an initialization switch signal is generated, and based on this, the information stored in the RAM 111C in the gaming microcomputer 111 and the RAM in the payout control device 200 is forcibly initialized. Processing is performed. Although not particularly limited, the initialization switch signal is read when the power is turned on, and the power failure monitoring signal is repeatedly read in the main loop of the main program executed by the gaming microcomputer 111. The reset signal is a type of forced interrupt signal and causes the entire control system to be reset.

  The gaming microcomputer 111 includes a CPU (central processing unit: microprocessor) 111A, a read only ROM (read only memory) 111B, and a random access memory (RAM) 111C which can be read and written as needed.

  The ROM 111B stores invariable information (program, fixed data, determination values of various random numbers, etc.) for game control in a non-volatile manner, and the RAM 111C stores a working area of the CPU 111A and storage areas of various signals and random values during game control. It is used as An electrically rewritable non-volatile memory such as an EEPROM may be used as the ROM 111B or the RAM 111C.

  Further, the ROM 111B stores, for example, a variation pattern table for determining a variation pattern (variation mode) that defines the execution time of the special view variation display game, the contents of the effect, the presence or absence of the reach state, and the like. The variation pattern table is a table for the CPU 111A to determine a variation pattern by referring to the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 stored as start storage. Further, the fluctuation pattern table includes a falling fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a falling, a big hit fluctuation pattern table selected when the result is a big hit, and the like. Further, in these pattern tables, tables for determining a second half fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation pattern after reaching the reach state (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.), fluctuation before reaching the reach state A table (a first half fluctuation group table, a first half fluctuation pattern selection table, etc.) for determining a first half fluctuation pattern which is a pattern is included.

  Here, the reach (reach state) has a display device capable of changing the display state, the display device derives and displays a plurality of display results at different times, and the plurality of display results are determined in advance. In the gaming machine 10 in which the gaming state is a gaming state (special gaming state) advantageous to the player when the special result mode is obtained, derivation is already made at a stage where a part of the plurality of display results is not yet derived and displayed. This refers to a display state in which the displayed display results satisfy the conditions for the special result mode. In addition, the reach state is deviated from the display condition which is the special result mode even when reaching the stage before the variable display control of the display device progresses and the display result is derived and displayed. There is no display mode. Then, for example, the reach state includes a state (so-called all-rotation reach) in which variable display is performed by a plurality of variable display areas while maintaining the state in which the special result mode is uniform. Further, the reach state is a display state at the time when display control of the display device progresses to a stage before the display result is derived and displayed, and is determined before the display result is derived and displayed. This refers to the display state in the case where at least a part of the display results of the plurality of variable display areas satisfies the condition to be the special result mode.

  Therefore, for example, the decorative special view fluctuation display game displayed on the display device corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game fluctuates a plurality of identification information for a predetermined time in each of the left, middle and right fluctuation display areas in the display device. When displaying the result mode by stopping the variable display in the order of left, right, and middle and displaying the result mode, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in the left and right variable display areas (for example, The state where the variable display is stopped by the same identification information) is the reach state. In addition to this, when the fluctuation display of all the fluctuation display areas is temporarily stopped, the condition that the special result mode is satisfied in any two of the left, middle, and right fluctuation display areas is satisfied (for example, the same The state where the identification information is obtained, but excluding the special result aspect) may be set as the reach state, and the remaining one variable display area may be variably displayed from the reach state.

  And, this reach state includes a plurality of reach effects, and the possibility of deriving a special result aspect is different (expected values are different) as reach effects such as normal reach (N reach), special 1 reach (SP1 reach), Special 2 reach (SP2 reach), Special 3 reach (SP3 reach), and Premier reach are set. Expected values are set to increase in the order of no reach <normal reach <special 1 reach <special 2 reach <special 3 reach <premier reach. Further, this reach state is included in the variable display mode at least when the special result mode is derived in the special view variable display game (when it is a big hit). That is, it may be included in the variable display mode in the case where it is determined that the special result mode is not derived in the special view variable display game (when it is out of alignment). Therefore, the state in which the reach state occurs is a state in which the possibility of a big hit is higher than the case in which the reach state does not occur.

  The CPU 111A executes a game control program in the ROM 111B to generate control signals (commands) for the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300, and generate and output drive signals for solenoids and display devices. 10 Take control of the whole. Also, although not shown, the gaming microcomputer 111 is a big hit random number for determining the hit of the special figure variation display game, a big hit symbol random number for determining the big hit symbol, a variation pattern in the special figure variation display game (various A variation pattern random number for determining the variation display game execution time etc. in reach display or non-reach variation display, and a random number generation circuit for generating a collision random number etc for determining hit of the common drawing variation display game And a clock generator for generating a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113 and a clock giving update timing of the random number generation circuit. There is.

  Further, the CPU 111A acquires any one variation pattern table from among the plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B in the processing relating to the special figure variation display game. Specifically, the CPU 111A is a game result (big hit or small hit) of the special view variation display game or a probability state (normal probability state or high probability) of the special view variation display game as the current gaming state. Condition), the operation condition (time-saving operation condition) of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 as the current gaming state, the number of starting memories, etc., one of the fluctuation pattern tables is selected from the plurality of fluctuation pattern tables Get. Here, the CPU 111A serves as variation distribution information acquisition means for acquiring any one variation pattern table among a plurality of variation pattern tables stored in the ROM 111B when executing the special figure variation display game.

  The payout control device 200 includes a CPU, a ROM, a RAM, an input interface, an output interface, etc., and drives a payout motor of the payout unit in accordance with a prize ball payout command (command or data) from the game control device 100 to drive the prize balls. Control to pay out. Further, the payout control device 200 drives the payout motor of the payout unit based on the ball lending request signal from the card unit, and performs control for dispensing the ball.

  In the input section 120 of the gaming microcomputer 111, a board radio wave sensor 62 for detecting the emission of radio waves to the gaming machine, a starting opening 1 switch 36a in the starting winning opening 36, a starting opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, It is connected to the gate switch 34a in the drawing start gate 34, the winning opening switch 35a, and the special winning opening switch 38a of the special variation winning device 38, and the high level supplied from these switches is 11V and the low level is 7V. An interface chip (proximity I / F) 121 is provided which receives a logic signal and converts it into a 0V-5V positive logic signal. The proximity I / F 121 has an input range of 7 V-11 V, so the leads of the sensor or proximity switch are improperly shorted, the sensor or switch is disconnected from the connector, or the lead is disconnected and floating. It is configured to be able to detect an abnormal state as it has become and to output an abnormality detection signal.

  The output of the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the second input port 123 or the third input port 124 and read into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. Note that among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the start opening 1 switch 36a, the start opening 2 switch 37a, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a and the big winning opening switch 38a are input to the second input port 123 . Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, a detection signal of the board radio wave sensor 62 and an abnormality detection signal output when an abnormality of the sensor or the switch is detected is input to the third input port 124. Further, in the third input port 124, a detection signal of a magnetic sensor 61 for detecting fraud which is provided on the front frame 12 of the gaming machine 10 or the like, or a glass frame opening detection provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like. A detection signal of the switch 63 and a detection signal of a main frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (main frame) 12 or the like of the gaming machine 10 are also input. Note that a vibration sensor switch for detecting vibration may be provided in the gaming machine, and a detection signal may be input to the third input port 124.

  Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, the output to the second input port 123 is also supplied from the main substrate 100 to the non-illustrated test shot test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. Further, among the outputs of the proximity I / F 121, detection signals of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a are configured to be input to the gaming microcomputer 111 in addition to the second input port 123.

  As described above, the proximity I / F 121 has a signal level conversion function. In order to enable such a level conversion function, the proximity I / F 121 is supplied with a voltage of 12 V in addition to a voltage such as 5 V required for the operation of a normal IC from the power supply device 400. It has become.

  The data held by the second input port 123 is read out by asserting the enable signal CE2 (changing to a valid level) by the gaming microcomputer 111 decoding the address assigned to the second input port 123 be able to. The same applies to the third input port 124 and the first input port 122 described later.

  The input unit 120 also receives a frame radio wave unauthorized signal from the payout control device 200 (a signal output based on the detection of radio waves by the frame radio sensor provided on the front frame 12), a payout busy signal (payment control device A signal indicating whether or not 200 can accept a command), a payout abnormal status signal (a status signal indicating a payout abnormal), a shoot ball out switch signal (a signal indicating a shortage of gaming balls before payout), an overflow switch signal (A signal output when it is detected that the game ball is stored in the lower tray 23 by a predetermined amount or more (full)), a touch switch signal (input of a touch switch provided in the operation unit 24) A first input port 122 is provided which takes in a signal based on the above and supplies it to the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140.

  In addition, the input unit 120 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 125 for inputting signals such as a power failure monitoring signal and a reset signal from the power supply device 400 to the gaming microcomputer 111 and the like. Has a function to remove noise from the The power failure monitoring signal from the power supply device 400 and the initialization switch signal from the RAM initialization switch 112 are once input to the first input port 122 and taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 via the data bus 140. That is, they are treated as signals equivalent to the signals from the various switches described above. This is because the number of terminals for receiving external signals provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 is limited.

  On the other hand, the reset signal RESET from which noise is removed by the Schmitt buffer 125 is directly input to the reset terminal provided in the gaming microcomputer 111 and supplied to each port of the output unit 130. Further, by outputting the reset signal RESET directly to the relay board 70 without passing through the output unit 130, the test injection test signal held in the port (not shown) of the relay board 70 for output to the test injection test apparatus is turned off. Is configured as. In addition, the reset signal RESET may be configured to be able to be output to the test irradiation test apparatus via the relay substrate 70. The reset signal RESET is not supplied to each port 122, 123, 124 of the input unit 120. It is necessary to reset the data set in each port of the output unit 130 by the gaming microcomputer 111 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input, but it is necessary to reset the data of the input unit 120 immediately before the reset signal RESET is input. This is because the data read by the gaming microcomputer 111 from the port is discarded when the gaming microcomputer 111 is reset.

  The output unit 130 is provided with a Schmitt buffer 132 disposed in a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the effect control device 300 and a communication path from the gaming microcomputer 111 to the payout control device 200. Data is transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 by serial communication. In addition, it is set as one-way communication which made it impossible to input a signal from the side of the effect control device 300 to the game control device 100.

  Further, the output unit 130 is connected to the data bus 140 and transmits data indicating the special symbol pattern information of the variable display game to a test shot test device of a recognized organization (not shown) via a relay board 70 etc. An output buffer 133 is configured to be mountable. The buffer 133 is a component that is not mounted on a game control apparatus (main board) of a pachinko gaming machine as a real machine (mass-produced article for sale) installed in a game arcade. A detection signal of a switch which does not need to be processed, such as a starting opening switch, output from the proximity I / F 121 is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus through the relay substrate 70 without passing through the buffer 133.

  On the other hand, detection signals that can not be supplied to the test shooting test device as they are like the magnetic sensor 61 and the board radio wave sensor 62 are once taken into the gaming microcomputer 111 and processed into other signals or information. It is supplied from the data bus 140 through the buffer 133 and the relay substrate 70 as an error signal indicating that it can not be done to the trial shot test apparatus. The relay board 70 is provided with a port that takes in the signal output from the buffer 133 and supplies it to the test shot test device, and a connector that relays and transmits a signal line of a detection signal of a switch that does not pass the buffer. ing. A chip enable signal CE output from the gaming microcomputer 111 is also supplied to the port on the relay board 70, and a signal of the port selected and controlled by the signal CE is supplied to the test shooting test apparatus.

  The output unit 130 also includes a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid) 38 b connected to the data bus 140 to open the special fluctuation winning device 38 and a solenoid (common electric solenoid) 37 c opening the movable member 37 b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. A second output port 134 is provided to output open / close data of The output unit 130 also includes a third output port 135 for outputting on / off data of the segment line to which the anode terminal of the LED is connected according to the content displayed on the collective display device 50, and the collective display device 50. A fourth output port 136 is provided for outputting on / off data of the digit line to which the cathode terminal of the LED of FIG.

  In addition, the output unit 130 is provided with a fifth output port 137 for outputting information related to the gaming machine 10 such as the big hit information to the external information terminal board 71. The external information terminal board 71 is provided with a photo relay, and can be connected to, for example, an external device (such as an information collecting terminal or a game arcade internal management device (hall computer) etc.) installed in the game arcade. It can be supplied to an external device. The fifth output port 137 also outputs a release permission signal to the payout control device 200 via the Schmitt buffer 132.

  Furthermore, a first driver (drive circuit) 138a that generates and outputs a solenoid drive signal in response to the open / close data signal of the special winning opening solenoid 38b or the common power solenoid 37c output from the second output port 134 to the output unit 130. The second driver 138 b for outputting the on / off driving signal of the segment line on the current supply side of the batch display device 50 output from the third output port 135, and the current of the batch display device 50 output from the fourth output port 136 Third driver 138c outputting on / off driving signal of lead-in side digit line, fourth driver 138d outputting external information signal supplied from the fifth output port 137 to external device such as management device to external information terminal board 71 Is provided.

  The first driver 138a is supplied with DC 32 V as a power supply voltage from the power supply device 400 in order to drive a solenoid operating at 32 V. Further, DC 12 V is supplied to the second driver 138 b that drives the segment lines of the batch display device 50. Since the third driver 138c for driving the digit line is for drawing out the digit line according to the display data, the power supply voltage may be 12V or 5V.

  A dynamic drive system is achieved by flowing a current into the anode terminal of the LED through the segment line by the second driver 138b that outputs 12 V and extracting the current from the cathode terminal through the segment line by the third driver 138c that outputs the ground potential. The power supply voltage flows to the LEDs sequentially selected in step S1 and is turned on. The fourth driver 138 d for outputting the external information signal to the external information terminal board 71 is supplied with 12 V DC to give a level of 12 V to the external information signal. The buffer 133, the second output port 134, the first driver 138a, and the like may be provided on the relay board 70 side, not on the output section 130 of the game control apparatus 100, that is, the main board.

  Furthermore, the output unit 130 is provided with a photocoupler 139 for transmitting information such as an identification code and a program of each gaming machine to the external inspection apparatus 500. The photocoupler 139 is configured to be communicable with each other so that the gaming microcomputer 111 can exchange data with the inspection device 500 by serial communication. Since such transmission and reception of data are performed using the serial communication terminal of the gaming microcomputer 111 as in a general-purpose microprocessor, no ports like the input ports 122, 123, 124 are provided.

Next, the configuration of the effect control device 300 will be described using FIG.
The effect control device 300 is for displaying an image on the display device 41 in accordance with a command and data from the main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 which comprises an amusement chip (IC) like the game microcomputer 111 and the main control microcomputer 311. A video display processor (VDP) 312 as a graphic processor for performing image processing, and a sound source LSI 314 for controlling the output of sound to reproduce various melodies and sound effects from the speakers 19a and 19b.

  The main control microcomputer 311 has a program ROM 321 consisting of a program executed by the CPU and a PROM (programmable read only memory) storing various data, a RAM 322 for providing a work area, and storage contents even when power is not supplied at power failure A FeRAM 323 which can be held, and an RTC (real time clock) 338 which is a clock means for generating information indicating the current date and time (date, day, time, etc.) are connected. A RAM for providing a work area is also provided inside the main control microcomputer 311. Further, a WDT (watchdog timer) circuit 324 is connected to the main control microcomputer 311. The main control microcomputer 311 analyzes the command from the gaming microcomputer 111, determines the contents of the effect, and instructs the VDP 312 the contents of the output video, instructs the sound source LSI 314 to play the sound, lights up the decoration lamp, and motor Execute processing such as driving control of the solenoid and management of presentation time.

  The VDP 312 is provided with a RAM 312a for providing a work area, and a scaler 312b for enlarging and reducing an image. Also, the VDP 312 is an image ROM 325 storing character images and video data, and an ultra-high-speed VRAM (video RAM) used to expand and process image data such as characters read from the image ROM 325 ) Is connected.

  Although not particularly limited, transmission / reception of data is performed between the main control microcomputer 311 and the VDP 312 in a parallel manner. By transmitting and receiving data in a parallel manner, commands and data can be transmitted in a shorter time than in the serial case.

  A vertical synchronization signal VSYNC for synchronizing the image of the display device 41 and the lighting of the decoration lamp provided on the glass frame 15 or the game board 30 to the microcomputer for main control 311 from the VDP 312, and a synchronization signal for giving data transmission timing STS is input. The VDP 312 notifies the main control microcomputer 311 that it is waiting to receive interrupt signals INT0 to n and commands and data from the main control microcomputer 311 in order to notify the processing status such as the end of drawing in the VRAM. A wait signal WAIT or the like is also input.

  The effect control device 300 is provided with a signal conversion circuit 313 that generates a video signal to be transmitted to the display device 41 by the LVDS (small amplitude signal transmission) method. Video data, horizontal synchronization signal HSYNC and vertical synchronization signal VSYNC are input from the VDP 312 to the signal conversion circuit 313, and the image generated by the VDP 312 is input to the display device 41 via the signal conversion circuit 313. Is displayed.

  A voice ROM 327 storing voice data is connected to the sound source LSI 314. The main control microcomputer 311 and the tone generator LSI 314 are connected via an address / data bus 340. Further, an interrupt signal INT is input from the tone generator LSI 314 to the main control microcomputer 311. The effect control device 300 is provided with an amplifier circuit 337 including an audio power amplifier for driving the upper speaker 19 a provided on the glass frame 15 and the lower speaker 19 b provided on the front frame 12. The generated sound is output from the upper speaker 19a and the lower speaker 19b via the amplifier circuit 337.

  Further, the effect control device 300 is provided with an interface chip (command I / F) 331 for receiving a command transmitted from the game control device 100. The decoration control command signal (rendering command (rendering command, etc.) is transmitted via the command I / F 331 to the decoration special drawing reservation number command, decoration special drawing command, variation command, stop information command, etc. transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300. Receive as). Since the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control device 100 operates at DC 5 V and the main control microcomputer 311 of the effect control device 300 operates at DC 3.3 V, the command I / F 331 is provided with the function of converting the signal level There is.

  In addition, in the effect control device 300, a panel decoration LED control circuit for driving and controlling a panel decoration device 46 having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the game board 30 (including the center case 40) and the sub information display device 90. 332, a frame decoration LED control circuit 333 for driving and controlling a frame decoration device (for example, the frame decoration device 18 etc.) having an LED (light emitting diode) provided on the glass frame 15; a game board 30 (including the center case 40) A panel effect movable body control circuit 334 is provided which drives and controls the provided panel effect device 44 (for example, a movable character that enhances the effect effect in cooperation with the effect display on the display device 41). These control circuits 332 to 334 for driving and controlling the lamp, the motor, the solenoid and the like are connected to the main control microcomputer 311 via the address / data bus 340. In addition, the glass frame 15 is provided with a drive source such as a motor (for example, a motor for operating a device for effect) and the like, and forms a movable effect device which performs game effects including a special view change display game A presentation device may be provided, and a frame presentation movable body control circuit may be provided to drive and control the frame presentation device.

  Furthermore, in the effect control device 300, the effect button switch 25a incorporated in the effect button 25 provided in the glass frame 15, the touch panel 29 provided in the glass frame 15, the initial position of the motor in the panel effect device 44, etc. To detect the on / off state of the effect combination product switch 47 (rendering motor switch) to detect the detection signal input to the main control microcomputer 311, the state of the volume control switch 335 provided in the effect control device 300 And a switch input circuit 336 for inputting a detection signal to the main control microcomputer 311.

  The normal power supply unit 410 of the power supply device 400 drives a motor or a solenoid in order to supply a desired level of DC voltage to the effect control device 300 having the above-described configuration and electronic components controlled thereby. In addition to DC32V of DC, display device 41 consisting of liquid crystal panel, DC12V for driving motor and LED, DC5V used as power supply voltage of command I / F 331, generates voltage of DC15V for driving motor, LED and speaker It is configured to Furthermore, when an LSI operating at a low voltage such as 3.3 V or 1.2 V is used as the main control microcomputer 311, DC − for generating 3.3 V DC or 1.2 V DC based on 5 V DC. A DC converter is provided in the effect control device 300. The DC-DC converter may be provided in the normal power supply unit 410.

  The reset signal generated by the control signal generation unit 430 of the power supply device 400 is supplied to the main control microcomputer 311 to put the device in a reset state. Further, the VDP 312 (VDPRESET signal), the sound source LSI 314, the amplifier circuit 337 (SNDRESET signal) for driving the speaker, and the control circuits 332 to 334 (IORESET) for driving and controlling the lamp and the motor are outputted from the main control microcomputer 311. Signal) to reset them. Further, a cooling fan 45 for cooling each part of the game machine 10 is connected to the effect control device 300, and the cooling fan 45 is driven in a state where the power of the effect control device 300 is turned on.

  In the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, a game is played by striking a gaming ball (pachinko ball) from a launch device (not shown) toward the gaming area 32. The shot game balls run down the game area 32 while changing the rolling direction by turning members such as obstacle nails and windmills arranged at various places in the game area 32, and the common view starting gate 34 and the general winning opening 35 The start winning hole 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37 or the special fluctuation winning device 38, or flows into the out port 30a provided at the bottom of the game area 32, and is discharged from the game area 32. And, when the game ball wins the general winning a prize opening 35, the starting winning a prize opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 or the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38, the prize balls of the number according to the kind of the winning a prize opening won out From the dispensing unit controlled by FIG.

  A gate switch 34a (see FIG. 4) including a non-contact switch or the like for detecting the gaming ball having passed through the common view start gate 34 is provided in the common view start gate 34, and the game area 32 When the game ball driven in passes through the inside of the drawing start gate 34, it is detected by the gate switch 34a. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the number of common drawing start memories is an upper limit number (for example, four) based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a provided in the common drawing start gate 34. If it is less than (1), the common drawing start memory number is added (+1) and one common drawing start memory is stored in the ROM 111B. The number of memories of the common drawing start winning combination is displayed on the common drawing reservation display 56 of the batch display device 50. Further, the common drawing start memory stores a random number value (hit random number) for hit determination for determining the result of the common drawing variation display game extracted based on the input of the detection signal of the gaming ball from the gate switch 34a. It is supposed to be

  If the common drawing start memory is present and the common drawing fluctuation display game can be started, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is not being executed, and the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is converted If it is not the hit state, the hit determination random number value stored in the first stored common drawing start memory is compared with the judgment value stored in the ROM 111B to determine the hit deviation of the common drawing fluctuation display game And perform a process of starting a common drawing variation display game. When the hit determination random number value matches the determination value, the common drawing variation display game becomes a hit, and a specific result aspect (common drawing identification result) is derived.

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 predetermines a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined for a predetermined fluctuation time in the common drawing indicator 53 provided on the collective display device 50 as processing for executing the common drawing fluctuation display game. After displaying the common map during the repeated display in the above order, a processing for displaying the common map change display game is performed to stop and display the lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result. In addition, the ordinary drawing display 53 is configured by the display device 41, and for example, numbers, symbols, character symbols, etc. are used as ordinary identification information, and after being displayed for a predetermined period of time, it is stopped and displayed. You may configure.

  If the result of the popular drawing variation display game is a hit, the lighting pattern which becomes any of the first hit stop symbol to the third hit stop symbol which makes a special result aspect in the common symbol display 53 according to the type of hit. The stop display is performed, and the common power solenoid 37c is operated to perform control to open the movable member 37b of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 for a predetermined time (for example, 0.5 seconds or 1.7 seconds) as described above. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes conversion control execution means for performing conversion control of the conversion member (movable member 37b). When the result of the common drawing variation display game is a release, control is performed to display a lighting pattern which is a result of the deviation on the common drawing display 53.

  In addition, the winning balls to the start winning hole 36 and the winning balls to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 are detected by the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a respectively provided inside. In the CPU 111A of the gaming microcomputer 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100, the first start memory, which makes a start memory (a special figure start memory) based on winning on the start winning hole 36, is limited to a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four). In addition to storing, the second starting memory which makes starting memory (special figure starting memory) based on the prize winning to the normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is stored with a predetermined upper limit number (for example, four pieces) as a limit. A big hit random number value, a big hit symbol random number value, and each variation pattern random number value are extracted as start memory information based on winning on the starting winning opening 36 and the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and the extracted disturbances are extracted The numerical values are stored in the RAM 111B as the first start storage and the second start storage. Then, the number of stored start-up memories is displayed on the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 of the collective display 50, and the special view start store is also displayed on the display 41 of the center case 40. Displayed as a display. In addition, it is displayed also on the first sub display unit 91 and the second sub display unit 92 of the sub information display device 90.

  The CPU 111A of the game control device 100 stores the first start memory corresponding to the special view change display game to be started when the first special view change display game or the second special view change display game can be started. A process of determining the hit of the special figure variation display game or the like is performed by comparing the determined big hit determination random number value with the determination value stored in the ROM 111B. Furthermore, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 outputs, to the effect control device 300, a control signal (effect control command) including the determination result of the special view variation display game to be executed.

  And, when executing the first special figure fluctuation display game, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 1 display 51 (the fluctuation display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 1 is displayed during the change, a process is performed to display a first special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is displayed in a stopped state. In addition, when the second special figure fluctuation display game is executed, a plurality of lighting patterns predetermined by the special figure 2 display 52 (the variable display device) are repeatedly displayed in a predetermined order over a predetermined fluctuation time. After the special figure 2 is displayed during the change, a process of displaying a second special figure change display game in which a lighting pattern (result mode) according to the result is stopped and displayed is performed.

  Further, in the effect control device 300, based on the control signal from the game control device 100, a plurality of types of identification information (for example, numbers, symbols, characters) corresponding to the special view change display game on the display device 41 (the change display device). A process of displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which a symbol etc. is variably displayed is displayed. Further, the sub game display unit of the sub information display device 90 performs processing for displaying a decorative special view variable display game in which the light emission mode of the light emitting unit is changed corresponding to the special view variable display game. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 performs processing of setting of effect state, output of sound from the speakers 19a and 19b, control of light emission of various LEDs, and the like based on a control signal from the game control device 100. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as effect control means for controlling an effect on a game (a variable display game or the like).

  The decoration special figure variation display game in the display device 41 is, for example, a left variation display area (first special symbol), a right variation display area In each of the second special symbol) and the middle variation display area (third special symbol), each symbol is variably displayed (high speed variation) at a speed that makes identification difficult. Then, the symbols changing after a predetermined time are stopped sequentially in the order of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area, and stopped in each of the left change display area, the right change display area, and the middle change display area. It is performed by displaying the result of the special figure variation display game according to the result mode configured by the displayed identification information. In addition, in the display device 41, various effect display such as appearance of a character is performed to improve interest.

  And, if the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, the CPU 111A of the game control device 100 becomes a special result aspect or a small hit result aspect to the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52. While displaying a lighting pattern, the processing which generates a special game state and a small hit game state is performed. In addition, the result mode of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 corresponding to this is also a special result mode or a small hit result mode.

  In the processing to generate the special gaming state and the small hitting gaming state, for example, the CPU 111A of the gaming control device 100 opens the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38 by the big winning opening solenoid 38b, and plays the game into the big winning opening Control to allow inflow of balls. Then, until a predetermined number (for example, 10) of game balls win in the special winning opening, or a predetermined openable time elapses from the opening of the special winning opening, the special winning opening is achieved. Is a round, and the control (cycle game) is performed to repeat (repeat) this for a predetermined number of rounds. That is, when the stop result mode is the special result mode, the game control apparatus 100 forms a special winning opening / closing control means that performs control to open and close the special winning opening. In addition, when the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval, control is performed to display a result mode of the deviation on the special figure 1 display 51 or the special figure 2 display 52.

  In addition, the game control device 100 can generate a high probability state as a game state after the end of the special game state, based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. The high probability state is a state in which the probability of being a hit result in the special figure fluctuation display game is higher than that of the normal probability state. In addition, the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure even in the high probability state based on the result form of the special figure fluctuation display game of the first special figure fluctuation display game and the second special figure fluctuation display game Both of the variable display games are in a high probability state.

  In addition, the game control apparatus 100 can generate a time saving state (a specific game state, a common drawing high probability state) as a game state after the end of the special game state based on the result mode of the special figure variation display game. In this short time state, the probability (common drawing probability) to be the hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is set to a high probability (general drawing high probability state) higher than 0 which is the normal probability (general drawing low probability state) Is possible. As a result, control is performed so that the opening time of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 per unit time is larger than that in the case where the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is in the low probability state. Here, in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 in the present embodiment, the drawing probability is set to 0 so as not to open the movable member 37b in the normal gaming state.

  Further, in the time saving state, the execution time of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing fluctuation time) is, for example, 500 ms, and the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game is, for example, 600 ms, When the common game variation display game hits and results in the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 being opened, the opening time of the first hit stop symbol (general electric station opening time) and the number of times of opening (for example, 500 ms × 1 time), The opening time of the second stop symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × 2 times), the third opening time of the stopping symbol (general power opening time) and the number of opening (for example, 1700 ms × It can be set to be 3 times).

  In addition, the execution time of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the common drawing stop time, the number of times of general electric power release, and the general electric power release time are appropriately set to perform control to set the common fluctuation display game and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the short time operation state. For example, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the execution time (general drawing fluctuation time) of the common drawing fluctuation display game described above to be a second fluctuation time shorter than the first fluctuation time. (For example, 10000 ms is 1000 ms). Moreover, in the time saving state, it is possible to control the common drawing stop time for displaying the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game to be the second stop time shorter than the first stop time (for example, 1604 ms is 704 ms). Further, in the time saving state, when the common drawing fluctuation display game hits and the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened, the opening time (the general public opening time) is the normal state (general drawing low probability state) It is possible to control to become the 2nd opening time longer than 1 opening time (for example, 100 ms is 1352 ms). Also, in the time saving state, the number of times of opening of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 (the number of times of general electric power release) is greater than the number of first open times (for example, 2 times) with respect to one hit result of the common drawing fluctuation display game. It is possible to set the second opening number of times (for example, four times). Also, in the time saving state, the probability of becoming a hit result of the common drawing variation display game (general drawing probability) is higher than the normal probability (general drawing low probability state, for example, 1/251) in the normal operating state. It is possible to have a probability (generally high probability state, for example, 250/251).

  In the short time state, the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is opened by changing any one or more of the common drawing fluctuation time, the common drawing stop time, the number of common power release times, the common power release time, and the common drawing probability. Make the conversion time longer than usual. Moreover, it is also possible to set a plurality of types of time saving states which are different from each other. In the case of a hit, either the first open mode or the second open mode may be selected. In this case, the selection probabilities of the first opening mode and the second opening mode may be made different. Also, the high probability state and the short time state can be generated independently of each other, and both can be generated simultaneously or only one can be generated.

  The special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 may be separate displays or the same display, but each special view fluctuation display so as not to be executed independently or simultaneously. The game is displayed. Also, the display device 41 may use separate display devices or separate display areas in the first special view variable display game and the second special view variable display game, or use the same display device or display area. The decoration special feature variation display game is displayed so as not to be executed independently and simultaneously, though it is good. Further, the special view variation display game may be executed only by the display device 41 without providing the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52 in the gaming machine 10. In addition, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when there is a start memory of the first special view change display game and the second special view change display game, and the special view change display game can be executed, the second special view change display game is It is to be executed (prioritized). Further, in the description of the present embodiment, when the first special view variation display game and the second special view variation display game are not distinguished from one another, they are simply referred to as a special view variation display game.

  Although not particularly limited, the start opening 1 switch 36a in the start winning opening 36, the start opening 2 switch 37a in the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gate switch 34a, the winning opening switch 35a, the special winning opening switch A noncontact magnetic proximity sensor (hereinafter referred to as a proximity switch) is used in 38a that has a coil for magnetic detection and detects a game ball using a phenomenon that a magnetic field changes when metal approaches the coil. ing. Also, a micro-switch having a mechanical contact on the glass frame opening detection switch 63 provided on the glass frame 15 of the gaming machine 10 or the like and the body frame opening detection switch 64 provided on the front frame (body frame) 12 etc. Can be used.

  Hereinafter, control of a gaming machine which performs such a game will be described. First, control executed by the gaming microcomputer (gaming microcomputer) 111 of the gaming control apparatus 100 will be described. The control processing by the gaming microcomputer 111 mainly includes the main processing shown in FIGS. 6 and 7 and the timer interrupt processing shown in FIG.

[Main processing]
First, the main processing will be described. The main process is started by turning on the power. In this main process, as shown in FIGS. 6 and 7, after the process of prohibiting the interrupt (step S1) is performed first, the start address of the area for saving the value of the register etc. when the interrupt occurs. A stack pointer setting process (step S2) for setting a certain stack pointer is performed. Next, register bank 0 is designated (step S3), and the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S4). In the case of this embodiment, the range of the address of the RAM is 0000h to 01FFh, and 00h or 01h is taken as the upper order, and the head 00h is set in step S4. Next, a signal for stopping the emission is output to set the emission permission signal to the prohibited state (step S5). The release permission signal is set to a prohibited state when at least one of the game control device 100 and the payout control device 200 outputs a signal to stop the release, and the release of the game ball is prohibited.

  Thereafter, the state of the input port 1 (first input port 122) is read (step S6), and a process of setting a power on delay timer is performed (step S7). In this process, the program of the slave control means (for example, the payout control device 200 and the effect control device 300) which performs various controls in accordance with the instruction from the game control device 100 forming the main control means by setting a predetermined initial value. A waiting time (for example, 3 seconds) to wait for normal activation is set. As a result, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 temporarily rises first, and sends a command to the slave control apparatus before the slave control apparatus (for example, the payout control apparatus 200 or the presentation control apparatus 300) starts up. Can avoid dropping commands. That is, when the power is turned on, the game control apparatus 100 delays the activation of the main control means (game control apparatus 100) and waits for the activation of the slave control apparatus (the payout control apparatus 200, the effect control apparatus 300, etc.) It constitutes a standby means for setting a standby time.

  Further, the power-on delay timer counts time by using a storage area (a RAM area or a register other than the validity determination target) which is not a target of the validity determination (check sum calculation) of the RAM. As a result, when the check data such as the checksum of the RAM area is calculated, it is not necessary to exclude and calculate a part of the RAM area, and it is possible to prevent the control at the time of turning on the power from becoming complicated.

  The initialization switch signal is input to the first input port 122. By reading the state of the first input port 122 before the start of the standby time, the operation of the initialization switch 112 is ensured. It can be detected. That is, when the state of the initialization switch 112 is read after the standby time has elapsed, the initialization switch 112 is operated after waiting for the standby time to elapse, or the initialization switch 112 is operated from the power on to the elapse of the standby time. You need to keep doing that. However, by reading the status before the start of the standby time, it becomes possible to detect by performing the operation immediately after the power is turned on without performing such troublesome operations, and the initialization operation performed at the time of the power on It can prevent the situation that can not be accepted.

  After the process of setting the power on delay timer (step S7), the process of measuring the waiting time and monitoring the occurrence of the power failure during the waiting time (steps S8 to S12) are performed. First, set the number of times (for example, 2) to read the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 through the port and the data bus (for example, 2 times) (step S8) Perform (step S9).

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S9; Y), it is determined whether the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks set in step S8 (step S10). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S10; N), the process returns to the determination (step S9) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. If the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S10; Y), that is, if it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the process waits for the power of the gaming machine to be shut off. As described above, it is possible to prevent erroneous detection of a power failure due to noise or the like by determining that a power failure has occurred when the power failure monitoring signal continues to be received for a predetermined period, thereby appropriately coping with a failure at the time of power on. can do.

  That is, the game control device 100 functions as a power failure monitoring means for monitoring the occurrence of a power failure in a predetermined standby time. As a result, it becomes possible to cope with a power failure that has occurred during a period in which the activation of the game control device 100 that forms the main control means is delayed, and it is possible to appropriately cope with a problem at the time of power on. Note that access to the RAM is not permitted until the end of the standby time, and the stored contents at the previous power-off are kept, so backup processing etc. is performed when a power failure occurs here. There is no need. Therefore, even if a power failure occurs during the waiting time, it is not necessary to back up the RAM, and the control load can be reduced.

  On the other hand, if the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S9; N), that is, if a power failure does not occur, the power on delay timer is updated by -1 (step S11). Is determined (step S12). If the value of the timer is not 0 (step S12; N), that is, if the waiting time has not ended, the process returns to the process of setting the number of checks of the power failure monitoring signal (step S8). If the value of the timer is 0 (step S12; Y), that is, if the waiting time is over, the access permission of read / write RWM (read / write memory) such as RAM or EEPROM is permitted (step S13). And outputs the off data to all output ports (set to a state where there is no output) (step S14).

  Next, a serial port (a port provided in advance in the gaming microcomputer 111 and used for communication with the effect control device 300 and the payout control device 200 in this embodiment) is set (step S15) and read first. From the state of the first input port 122, it is determined whether the initialization switch is turned on (step S16).

  If the initialization switch is off (step S16; N), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection area 1 in the RWM is normal power interruption inspection area check data 1 (for example, 5 Ah) (step S17). If it is (step S17; Y), it is determined whether the value of the power failure inspection region 2 in the RWM is normal power failure inspection region check data 2 (for example, A5h) (step S18). Then, if the value of the power failure inspection area 2 is normal (step S18; Y), the checksum calculation processing of calculating the checksum of the predetermined area in the RWM is performed (step S19), and the calculated checksum and power off It is determined whether the check sums of the two match (step S20). If the checksums match (step S20; Y), the process proceeds to step S21 of FIG. 7 to perform processing in the case of normal recovery from a power failure.

  In addition, when it is determined that the initialization switch is on (step S16; Y), or when it is determined that the check data of the power failure inspection area is not normal data (step S17; N or step S18; N) If it is determined that the checksum is not normal (step S20; N), the process proceeds to step S26 in FIG. 7 to perform initialization processing. That is, the initialization switch is an initialization operation unit that can be operated from the outside, and the game control device 100 initializes the data stored in the RAM based on the operation of the initialization operation unit. I

  In step S21 of FIG. 7, the initial value at the time of power failure recovery is saved in the area to be initialized (step S21). The area to be initialized here is an area relating to a power failure inspection area, a checksum area and an error fraud monitoring. Note that the busy signal status area storing the state of the payout busy signal, which is a signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can receive a command, is also cleared to indicate that the state of the payout busy signal is not determined. It is in an undetermined state. Similarly, the touch switch signal state monitoring area storing the state of the touch switch signal is also cleared, and the touch switch signal state is set to an undefined state indicating that the state of the touch switch signal is not determined. Thereafter, the area storing the gaming state in the RWM is checked to determine whether the probability state of the special view fluctuation display game is the high probability state (step S22). Here, when it is not in the high probability of the special view (step S22; N), the process skips steps S23 and S24 and shifts to step S25. Also, when the special drawing is in high probability (step S22; Y), the on information is saved in the high probability notification flag area (step S23), and the high probability notification LED (error indicator) provided on the game board 30 (On) data is saved in the segment area (step S24). And the command at the time of the power failure restoration corresponding to the processing number prepared in order to rationally execute the below-mentioned special figure game processing is transmitted to the production control board (presentation control device 300) (step S25), step S31 Go to In the case of the present embodiment, in step S25, a plurality of commands such as a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, and a screen designation command are transmitted. Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  The screen designation command transmits a command according to the resumed game state. When the special view variation display game interrupted due to the power supply interruption is resumed with the restart of control, the recovery screen command forming the recovery information is transmitted as the screen designation command. Further, in this case, the information on the result of the special view fluctuation display game to be resumed is also transmitted. In addition, when the power is shut off while waiting for customers and the control is resumed in the waiting for customers state due to restoration of the power supply, the customer waiting demo command is transmitted as a screen specification command. Further, when the special gaming state interrupted by the power-off is to be resumed along with the resumption of control, the special gaming state resume command is transmitted as the screen designation command.

  On the other hand, when jumping from step S16, S17, S18, S20 to step S26, the RAM access prohibited area is set to access permission (step S26), and all areas including the busy signal status area and the touch switch signal state monitoring area The RAM area is cleared to 0 (step S27), and the RAM access prohibited area is set to access prohibited (step S28). Then, the initial value at the time of RAM initialization is saved in the area to be initialized (step S29). Here, the area to be initialized is an area related to setting of the customer waiting demonstration area and the effect mode. Then, a command at the time of RAM initialization is transmitted to the effect control board (effect control device 300) (step S30), and the process proceeds to step S31. In the case of this embodiment, in step S30, a model designation command, a special figure 1 pending number command, a special figure 2 pending number command, a probability information command, a RAM initialization command (displaying a customer waiting demo screen and displaying a predetermined time (for example, Send a plurality of commands such as a command for notifying the initialization of the RAM with light and sound for 30 seconds). Further, depending on the model, in addition to these commands, the presentation frequency information command and the high probability frequency information command are also transmitted.

  In step S31, processing is performed to activate a CTC (Counter / Timer Circuit) circuit that generates a timer interrupt signal and a random number update trigger signal (CTC) in the gaming microcomputer 111 (clock generator). The CTC circuit is provided in a clock generator in the gaming microcomputer 111. The clock generator divides the oscillation signal (original clock signal) from the oscillation circuit 113, and a timer interrupt signal of a predetermined cycle (for example, 4 milliseconds) to the CPU 111A based on the divided signal. And a CTC circuit for generating a signal CTC for giving a trigger for updating the random number to be supplied to the random number generation circuit.

  After the CTC activation process of step S31, the random number generation circuit is activated and set (step S32). Specifically, setting of a code (designated value) for activating the random number generation circuit to a predetermined register (CTC update permission register) in the random number generation circuit is performed by the CPU 111A. Further, setting of bit transposition pattern of hard random numbers (here, big hit random numbers) generated by hardware of the random number generation circuit is also performed. The bit transposition pattern is a method to replace the bit arrangement of the extracted random number (arrangement before bit transposition in the upper row) in a predetermined order and store it as a different bit arrangement (arrangement after the bit transposition in the lower row) Is a pattern that determines By replacing the bits of the random number according to the bit transposition pattern, the regularity of the random number can be broken and the secrecy of the random number can be enhanced. The bit transposition pattern may be a fixed single pattern or may be selected from a plurality of patterns prepared in advance. Also, it may be set arbitrarily by the user.

  Thereafter, the values of predetermined registers (soft random number registers 1 to n) in the random number generation circuit at power-on are extracted, and corresponding various initial value random numbers (in the case of the present embodiment, random numbers for determining symbols per special drawing) (Big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number), random number to determine the hit of the common drawing (hit random number), RWM specified as the initial value (start value) of the random number to determine the hit symbol of the common drawing After saving in the area (step S33), the interrupt is permitted (step S34). The random number generation circuit in the CPU 111A used in the present embodiment is configured to change the initial value of the soft random number register every time the power is turned on. By doing this, it is possible to break the regularity of the random numbers generated by the software, and to make it difficult for the player to obtain an incorrect random number.

  Subsequently, an initial value random number updating process (step S35) is performed to update the values of various initial value random numbers and break the regularity of the random numbers. Although not particularly limited, in the present embodiment, the big hit random number, the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number are generated using random numbers generated in the random number generation circuit. Is configured as. However, the big hit random number is a so-called "high-speed counter" updated based on a clock equal to or faster than the CPU operation clock, and the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number is a program processing It is a "low-speed counter" updated based on the CTC output (CTC (CTC 2 different from CTC (CTC 0) in timer interrupt processing) having the same cycle as timer interrupt processing as a unit. Also, in the big hit symbol random number, small hit symbol random number, hit random number, hit symbol random number, so-called "initial value changing method of changing the start value using each initial value random number (generated by software) every time the random number makes a round Is adopted. Each of the random numbers may be a counter type update by +1 or -1, or may be a random type update in which all the values within the range appear apart without overlapping until one round. That is, the big hit random number is a random number updated only by hardware, and the big hit symbol random number, the small hit symbol random number, the hit random number, and the hit symbol random number is a random number updated by hardware and software.

  After the initial value random number update process of step S35, the number of times (for example, twice) of reading and checking the power failure monitoring signal input from the power supply 400 via the port and data bus is set (step S36) It is determined whether the monitoring signal is on (step S37). If the power failure monitoring signal is not on (step S37; N), the process returns to the initial value random number updating process (step S35). That is, when a power failure has not occurred, the initial value random number update processing and the check (loop processing) of the power failure monitoring signal are repeated. By permitting the interrupt (step S34) before the initial value random number update process (step S35), when the timer interrupt occurs during the initial value random number update process, the interrupt process is preferentially executed, and the timer interrupt is performed. By waiting for the initial value random number updating process, it is possible to avoid the pressure on the interrupt process.

  In addition to the main processing, there is also a method of performing initial value random number update processing in the timer interrupt processing in addition to the main processing, and the initial value random number update processing in the above step S35 is performed in both cases when such a method is adopted. In order to prevent the value random number update process from being performed, when performing the initial value random number update process in the main process, it is necessary to prohibit the interrupt and then update and cancel the interrupt. There is no problem in canceling the interrupt before the initial value random number update process if the initial value random number update process in the timer interrupt process is not performed but is performed only in the main process, and the main process It has the advantage of being simplified.

  If the power failure monitoring signal is on (step S37; Y), it is determined whether the power failure monitoring signal remains on for the number of checks set in step S36 (step S38). Then, if the on state of the power failure monitoring signal does not continue for the number of checks (step S38; N), the process returns to the determination (step S37) whether the power failure monitoring signal is on. In addition, when the on state of the power failure monitoring signal continues for the number of checks (step S38; Y), that is, when it is determined that a power failure has occurred, the processing for temporarily prohibiting the interrupt (step S39) A process (step S40) of outputting off data to the output port is performed.

  Thereafter, the blackout inspection area check data 1 is saved in the blackout inspection area 1 (step S41), and the blackout inspection area check data 2 is saved in the blackout inspection area 2 (step S42). Furthermore, a checksum calculation process (step S43) for calculating a checksum at the time of power interruption of the RWM, and a process for saving the calculated checksum (step S44), and then a process for prohibiting access to the RWM (step S45) ) And wait for the power to the game machine to shut off. As described above, by saving check data in the power failure inspection area and calculating a checksum at the time of power shutdown, it is determined whether or not the information stored in the RWM is correctly backed up before the power shutdown. It can be judged at the time of reinjection.

  From the above, main control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, and slave control means (disbursement control apparatus 200, effect control apparatus 300, etc.) for performing various controls in accordance with instructions from the main control means. Standby control means for setting a predetermined standby time for waiting for activation of the slave control device by delaying activation of the main control device when the power is turned on. And 100) and the blackout monitoring means (game control apparatus 100) for monitoring the occurrence of blackout in the predetermined standby time.

  Further, the power supply device 400 for supplying power to various devices is provided, and the power supply device 400 is configured to output a power failure monitoring signal when the occurrence of a power failure is detected, and the power failure monitoring means (game control device 100) When the power failure monitoring signal is continuously received for a predetermined period, it is determined that the power failure has occurred.

  Further, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) is based on the RAM 111C capable of storing data, an initialization operation unit (initialization switch) capable of external operation, and the operation of the initialization operation unit. An initialization unit (game control apparatus 100) for initializing data stored in the RAM 111C is provided, and the operation state of the initialization unit is read before the start of the standby time.

  Also, the main control means (game control apparatus 100) permits access to the RAM 111C after the standby time has elapsed.

[Checksum calculation processing]
FIG. 8 shows the checksum calculation process (steps S19 and S43) in the main process described above. In this checksum calculation process, first, the head address of RWM is set as the start value of the calculated address (step S51), the number of repetitions is set (step S52), and "0" is set as the calculated value (step S53). . The number of bytes of RAM being used is set to the number of repetitions.

  Thereafter, a value obtained by adding the calculated value to the content of the calculated address is taken as a new calculated value (step S54), the calculated address is updated by +1 (step S55), and the number of repetitions is updated by -1 (step S56). It is determined whether the calculation of has been completed (step S57). If the calculation is not completed (step S57; N), the process returns to step S54 and the above process is repeated. When the calculation is completed (step S57; Y), the checksum calculation process is ended.

Initial Value Random Number Update Process
FIG. 9 shows the initial value random number updating process (step S35) in the main process described above. In this initial value random number update process, first, the jackpot symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S61), and the small hit symbol initial value random number is updated by 1 (step S62). Then, the hit initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S63), the hit symbol initial value random number is updated by +1 (step S64), and the initial value random number updating process is ended.
Here, "big hit symbol initial value random number" is a random number that becomes the initial value of the random number that determines the big hit stop symbol of the special figure variation display game, and "small hit symbol initial value random number" is the small hit of the special figure variation display game It is the random number which becomes the initial value of the random number which decides the stop design. In addition, “the initial hit random number” is a random number that is the initial value of the random number that determines the hit of the common view variation display game, and “the first hit random number” is a random number that determines the stop symbol for the common view variation display game. It is a random number that becomes an initial value. Thus, the randomness of the random number can be enhanced by continuing to increment the initial value random number as long as time allows in the main processing.
In addition, small hit design random numbers naturally do not exist in models without small hits. In addition, depending on the model, there is also a gaming machine in which there is no hit symbol initial value random number.

[Timer interrupt processing]
Next, timer interrupt processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 10, the timer interrupt process is started by inputting a periodic timer interrupt signal generated by the CTC circuit in the clock generator to the CPU 111A. When a timer interrupt is generated in the gaming microcomputer 111, the interrupt is automatically disabled, and the timer interrupt process of FIG. 10 is started.

  When timer interrupt processing is started, first, register bank 1 is designated (step S101). Switching to the register bank 1 is equivalent to performing a register save process of transferring the value held in a predetermined register (for example, a register used in the main process) to the RWM. Next, the upper address of the RAM top address is set in a predetermined register (for example, D register) (step S102). In step S102, the same process as step S4 in the main process is performed, but the register bank is different. Next, input from various sensors and switches, and taking in of signals, that is, input processing for reading the state of each input port (step S103) is performed. Then, based on the output data set in the various processes, an output process (step S104) is performed to control the drive of an actuator such as a solenoid (large winning opening solenoid 38b, a common power solenoid 37c). Note that when a signal for stopping the emission is output in step S5 in the main processing, the output processing causes the emission permission signal to be output, and the emission permission signal can be set to the permission state. The launch permission signal is output to the launch control device via the payout control device. At that time, no signal processing is performed. Further, the release permission signal is a first signal indicating the state of release permission seen from the game control device, and a second signal (release permission signal) indicating the state of release permission viewed from the payout control device is also the payout control. It is generated in the device and output to the launch control device. That is, when two launch permission signals are output to the launch control device and both are permitted to launch, the gaming ball is configured to be in a state where it can be launched.

  Next, a payout command transmission process (step S105) for outputting a command set in the transmission buffer in various processes to the payout control device 200, a random number update process 1 (step S106), and a random number update process 2 (step S107) are performed. After that, monitoring whether or not there is an input of a normal signal from start opening 1 switch 36a, start opening 2 switch 37a, gate switch 34a of common drawing, winning opening switch 35a, big winning opening switch 38a, monitoring of error ( A winning opening switch / status monitoring process (step S108) is performed to determine whether the front frame and the glass frame are open. In addition, special figure game processing (step S109) which performs processing concerning a special figure fluctuation display game and common drawing game processing (step S110) which performs processing concerning a common drawing fluctuation display game is performed.

Next, segment LED editing processing (step S111) provided in the gaming machine 10 to drive the segment LED for displaying the special view variation display game and displaying various information related to the game to display desired content (step S111) Magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) that performs processing to check the detection signal from the sensor to determine whether there is an abnormality or board radio fraud that performs processing to check the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62 to determine whether there is an abnormality A monitoring process (step S113) is performed. Then, an external information editing process (step S114) is performed to set signals output to various external devices in the output buffer (step S114), and the timer interrupt process is ended.
Here, in the present embodiment, the process of restoring the interrupt disabled state (that is, the process of permitting the interrupt) and the process of restoring the specification of the register bank (that is, the process of specifying the register bank 0) Automatically at the time (at the end of timer interrupt processing). Note that, depending on the CPU to be used, there are gaming machines that need to be instructed to execute a process of restoring an interrupt disabled state and a process of restoring a register bank specification.

[Input processing]
Next, details of the input process (step S103) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 11, in the input process, first, the state of the detection signal of the switch taken into the input port 1, ie, the first input port 122, is read (step S121). Then, if there is an unused bit in the 8-bit port (input port 1), the state of that bit is cleared (step S122).

  Subsequently, the read state of the input port 1 is saved (stored) in the switch control area 1 in the RWM (step S123), and the address of the input port 2, that is, the second input port 123 is prepared (step S124). And the address of the switch control area 2 in the RWM (step S125). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data is prepared (step S126), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 2), the bit data Are prepared (step S127), and the switch reading process (step S128) is performed. Here, "prepare" in the present embodiment means setting a value in a register, but the present invention is not limited to this, and a value may be set in an RWM or another memory.

  Next, the address of the input port 3, that is, the third input port 124 is prepared (step S129), and the address of the switch control area 3 in the RWM is prepared (step S130). Thereafter, if there is an unused bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data is prepared (step S131), and if there is an inverted bit of the 8-bit port (input port 3), the bit data Are prepared (step S132), the switch reading process (step S133) is performed, and the input process is ended.

Unused bit data and inverted bit data are prepared for each input port.
Therefore, the unused bit data of the input port 2 prepared in step S126 and the unused bit data of the input port 3 prepared in step S131 may be different data but may be data of the same value as a result. is there.
Moreover, although the bit data to be inverted of the input port 2 prepared in step S127 and the bit data to be inverted of the input port 3 prepared in step S132 are different data, there is a possibility that they may be data of the same value as a result. is there.

[Switch reading process]
Next, details of the switch reading process (steps S128 and S133) in the above-described input process will be described. As shown in FIG. 12, in the switch reading process, first, the state of the signal taken into the target input port is read (step S141). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of that bit is cleared (step S142), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S143), and then the port input state 1 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S144). Then, it waits for the delay time (for example, about 100 microseconds) until the second reading to elapse (step S145).

  When the delay time has elapsed, the second reading of the state of the signal taken into the target input port is performed (step S146). Then, if there is an unused bit among the 8-bit port, the state of the bit is cleared (step S147), and the bit necessary for inversion is inverted (step S148), and then the port input state 2 of the target switch control area Save (store) (step S149). After that, a definite bit pattern in which the bit in the same state is 1 and the bit in the other is 0 in the first and second readings is created (step S150), and the definite bit pattern and port input state 2 are ANDed this time The decision bit is set (step S151).

  Next, an undetermined bit pattern in which the state is 0 and the other bit is 1 in the first and second readings is created (step S152), and the logic between the undetermined bit pattern and the determined state at the previous interrupt The product is taken and it is set as the previously held bit (step S153). As a result, it is possible to obtain the state of a signal from which noise due to chattering of a switch or the like has been removed. Then, the currently determined bit and the previously held bit are combined and saved as the currently decided state (step S154), exclusive OR is performed between the previous and currently decided states, and saved as the rising edge (step S155). , Finish the switch reading process.

  When the timer interrupt cycle is short (for example, 2 ms), the switch reading is performed by reading the switch once for each interrupt processing and comparing the result with the previous reading result. Although there is a method of determining whether or not a change has occurred, if the state of the switch read in the previous interrupt is lost before the next interrupt processing, there is a possibility that the correct determination can not be made. On the other hand, by performing the switch reading process twice in one interruption process with a predetermined time difference as in the present embodiment, it is possible to avoid the above-mentioned problems.

[Output processing]
Next, the details of the output process (step S104) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 13, in the output process, first, off data is output (reset) to the output port 135 that outputs data of the segment of the batch display device (LED) 50 (step S161). Next, the data to be output is synthesized and output to the output port 134 for outputting the data of the common power solenoid 37c and the special winning opening solenoid 38b (step S162).

Then, the value of the digit counter for sequentially scanning the digit lines of the batch display device (LED) 50 is updated (step S163), and the output data of the digit line of the LED corresponding to the value of the digit counter is obtained (step S164). In the case of this embodiment, the value of the digit counter is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 3. Next, the acquired data and external information data are combined (step S165), and the combined data (for example, data of "door / frame open" data of "security signal") are output ports for digit / external information output It outputs to 136 (step S166).
Thereafter, the output data of the segment line is loaded from the segment area in the RWM corresponding to the value of the digit counter (step S167), and the loaded data is output to the output port 135 for segment output (step S168). In the present embodiment, for example, the special view 1 display 51 and the special view 2 display 52, the generic view indicator 53, the special view 1 reserve indicator 54 and the special view 2 reserve indicator 55, and the generic view reserve display The unit 56, the round display unit 60, and the second gaming state display unit 58 are turned on dynamically.

  Subsequently, various output data of external information are synthesized (step S169), and the synthesized data (for example, data of "big hit signal 1", data of "big hit signal 2", data of "big hit signal 3", "big hit signal" Output data of 4 "data of" pattern decision number signal ", data of" starting opening signal ", data of" main prize ball signal ") and output data of firing permission (step S170), and the synthesized data is The information is output to the output port 137 for outputting the external information / emission permission signal (step S171). Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 1 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S172). Thereafter, data output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 which outputs a test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 2 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S173).

  Next, the data output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test injection test device is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 3 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S174). Furthermore, the data output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 4 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S175). Then, the data output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 that outputs the test signal to the test shooting test apparatus is loaded and synthesized, and the synthesized data is output to the test terminal output port 5 on the relay substrate 70 (Step S176), the output process ends.

[Payout command transmission process]
Next, the details of the payout command transmission process (step S105) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 14, in the payout command transmission process, first, it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 2 (step S181).

  The winning number counter area is provided in the RAM 111C of the game control apparatus 100, and a winning number counter area 1 and a winning number counter area 2 are provided. The prize number counter area 1 is an area used to transmit a payout command (prize ball command) for instructing the payout control device 200 to pay out the prize balls, and the prize for which the payout command has not been transmitted yet The winning data corresponding to the ball is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 1 forms a winning ball command counter capable of storing information on the winning ball command.

  The winning number counter area 2 is for transmitting a main winning ball signal to be output to an external device every time the number of prize balls (the expected number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening reaches a predetermined number (here 10). In the area to be used, data of winning corresponding to the winning balls not subjected to the generation processing of the main winning ball signal is stored. That is, the winning number counter area 2 forms a main winning ball signal counter capable of storing information on the main winning ball signal. In addition to the main prize ball signal, a payout prize ball signal is output to the external device every time the number of prize balls actually paid out from the payout control device 200 reaches a predetermined number (here, 10). It is possible to monitor fraudulent payments by collating these two signals.

In these winning number counter areas, the winning number counter area is set according to the number of winning balls set for each winning opening (three winning balls, 10 winning balls, 14 winning balls in the case of this embodiment). The counter number of the corresponding winning number counter area is incremented by one based on the winning on the winning opening. That is, the information on the winning can be stored in units of one winning in the winning area. The winning number counter area 1 is assigned a wider area than the winning number counter area 2 so that more winning data can be stored. This is because the main prize ball signal can be transmitted regardless of the state of the transmission destination, while transmission may be suspended depending on the state of the payout control device 200 to which the payout command is the transmission destination. This is because data may be accumulated.
Specifically, in the case of the present embodiment, up to 65535 winnings can be stored in the three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 1, respectively. The three prize ball counter area, the ten prize ball counter area, and the 14 prize ball counter area of the prize number counter area 2 are configured to be able to store up to 255 prizes.

  In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 2 (step S181), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, “0” in the winning number counter area to be checked. Determine if there is a non-count number. Then, when there is no count number (step S181; N), the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated (step S182), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S183). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S183; Y), the process proceeds to step S192. On the other hand, when it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S183; N), the process returns to step S181 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 2 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S181 that there is a count number (step S181; Y), the count number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S184), and the target winning number counter area 2 The number of payouts corresponding to the address is acquired (step S185). Then, the value of the winning balls remaining number area and the acquired number of payouts are added (step S186), and the addition result is saved in the remaining winning balls area (step S187). In addition, as the value of the remaining number area of winning balls before this processing, a fraction which does not meet a predetermined number serving as a reference of the output of the main winning ball signal is stored.

Thereafter, 10 is subtracted from the addition result (step S188), it is determined whether the subtraction result is 0 or more (step S189), and if it is not 0 or more (step S189; N), the process proceeds to step S192. If the number is 0 or more (step S189; Y), the value of the main prize ball signal output frequency area is updated by +1 (step S190). That is, whenever the number of remaining winning balls is ten, the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal is updated by +1.
Then, the subtraction result is saved in the remaining number area of the winning balls (step S191), and the process returns to the process of step S188. As a result, the main prize ball signal is output to an external device such as a hall computer. That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms an external information output unit that outputs a main prize ball signal including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the game ball in the predetermined pay area. . In addition, when the payout of the game ball such as during a big hit is concentrated by outputting the main prize ball signal, the output of the prize ball signal is delayed along with the payout of the game ball, and the accurate occurrence occurred during the big hit It is possible to prevent such a problem that the number of winning balls can not be counted.
Here, the process of steps S181 to S191 is a process of updating (increasing) the number of outputs of the main winning ball signal, and the process of steps S192 to S201 is a process of transmitting a payout command.

  In step S192, if the payout command transmission timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S192), and it is determined whether the payout command transmission timer has become "0" (step S193). If the payout command transmission timer is not "0" (step S193; N), the payout command transmission process is ended. If the payout command transmission timer is "0" (step S193; Y), the payout busy signal flag is checked to determine whether the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194).

  The payout busy signal indicates whether or not the payout control device 200 can immediately start payout control, and the payout busy signal is in the on state (busy state) when the payout control can not be immediately started. Be done. That is, the payout busy signal can be said to be a signal indicating whether or not the payout command (prize ball command) can be received. That is, the payout busy signal makes a state signal indicating whether the payout control means (the payout control device 200) can start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is in the busy state (step S194; Y), the payout command transmission process is ended. That is, in the present embodiment, the payout command is not transmitted for each timer interrupt, but a predetermined time elapses (the value of the payout command transmission timer becomes 0), and the payout control device 200 can pay the prize ball. When in the state, it is configured to transmit a payout command. As described above, when the payout control device 200 can not immediately start the payout control and does not transmit the payout command, it is possible to perform the useless processing by preventing the subsequent processing regarding the transmission of the payout command. We try to prevent and reduce the burden of control.

  The conditions for the payout busy signal to be in the on state (busy status) are, for example, during the payout operation, the ball lending operation, the shoot ball out error, the overflow error, the frame radio wave illegal occurrence, the payout ball detection switch (dispensed The number of prize balls to be paid out in the memory of the payout control device 200 during an abnormality of a switch for monitoring a shot ball, a shortage of payout error, a payout excess error, and the number of unpaid balls Etc) (when it is not = 0) etc.

  If the payout busy signal is not in the busy state (step S194; N), it is checked whether there is a count in the winning number counter area 1 (step S195). In the process of checking whether there is a count in winning number counter area 1 (step S195), among the plurality of winning number counter areas provided for each winning ball number, "0" in the winning number counter area to be checked Determine if there is a non-count number.

  Then, when there is no count number (step S195; N), the address of winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated (step S196), and it is judged whether the checking of the counting numbers of all winning number counter areas is completed. It determines (step S197). If it is determined in this determination that all the checks have been completed (step S 197; Y), the payout command transmission process is terminated. On the other hand, if it is determined that all the checks have not been completed (step S197; N), the process returns to step S195 and the above process is repeated. In the case of the present embodiment, the address of the winning number counter area 1 to be checked is updated in the order of 3 prize ball counter area → 10 prize ball counter area → 14 prize ball counter area.

  If it is determined in step S195 that there is a counted number (step S195; Y), the counted number of the target winning number counter area is updated by -1 (step S198), and the target winning number counter area 1 The payout amount command corresponding to the address of is acquired (step S199). Then, the acquired payout amount command is written in the payout serial transmission buffer (step S200), the initial value is saved in the payout command transmission timer area (step S201), and the payout command transmission process is ended. The payout command transmission timer is for managing the transmission interval, and 200 ms is set as an initial value, for example.

  As a result, a payout command (prize ball command) in units of one winning in the winning area is generated and transmitted to the payout control device 200. The payout control device 200 controls the payout of a predetermined number of winning balls based on the payout command. That is, the state signal indicating whether or not the payout control means can start the payout control output from the payout control means (the payout control device 200) indicates that the game control device 100 can start the payout control. In this case, the winning ball command transmitting means transmits the winning ball command to the payout control means.

  As described above, since the game control apparatus 100 controls the game ball command to be transmitted based on the state signal output from the payout control apparatus 200, the award is made only when the payout control apparatus 200 can immediately execute the payout control. The ball command will be transmitted. As a result, the data corresponding to the winnings that have not been paid out will be held on the game control device 100 side, so when a power failure occurs, it will be backed up by the game control device 100 and backed up to the payout control device 200. Accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the function for

  In a conventional gaming machine (e.g., the gaming machine disclosed in Japanese Patent Laid-Open No. 2000-312759), when the power is shut off due to some reason, the payout control device 200 backs up data in its own storage means, and immediately before the power is shut off. The payout control state based on the data of is maintained. However, in the conventional gaming machine, there is a problem that the cost increases because the function for backing up is required. According to the present invention, accurate dispensing control can be realized without providing the dispensing control device 200 with a function for backup.

  Also, since the main prize ball signal transmitted to an external device is output regardless of the state of the payout busy signal, the main prize ball signal can be output without delay, and the external device such as a hall computer can pay out the prize balls. The time can be accurately grasped, for example, the base value can be grasped accurately. Further, since the prize ball instruction counter capable of storing information on the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball signal counter capable of storing the information on the main prize ball signal are separately provided, the prize ball instruction and the main prize ball having different transmission timings Information on signals can be managed separately, and information can be managed reliably.

  From the above, the game control is generally performed, and the game ball to the winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) provided in the game area 32 Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for transmitting a prize ball command based on the winning of the game, and payout control means (payout control device) for controlling the payout of the game ball based on the prize ball command transmitted from the game control means 200), and the game control means controls the payout ball command based on the status signal (busy signal) indicating whether or not the payout control means output from the payout control means can start payout control. The control to transmit to the means is performed, and when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is outputted from the payout control device. Payment The prize ball command is transmitted to the payout control means in response to the state signal indicating that the payout control can be started is continuously output from the payout control means over the predetermined period without transmitting to the control means. It will be like that.

  In addition, the game area 32 is provided with a plurality of winning areas with different numbers of winning balls (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38), and the game control means (game control device 100) The prize ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) which can specify the presence or absence of non-transmission of the prize ball command which instructs the payout control of the game ball for every prize ball number, the state signal can start the payout control , And when there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter, the winning ball command is sent to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the status signal indicates the payout control means It will be made to specify before specification of whether or not the payout control can be started before specification of whether or not there is an unsent winning ball command in each winning ball command counter.

  In addition, the game control is performed in an integrated manner, and a winning ball command is issued based on the winning of the gaming ball to a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation winning device 38) A game control means (game control device 100) for transmitting a game, and a payout control means (payout control device 200) for performing a payout control of a game ball based on a prize ball command sent from the game control means; The control means is configured to control the payout ball command when the status signal output from the payout control means and indicating that the payout control means can start the payout control indicates that the payout control can be started. A prize ball signal transmitting means (game control apparatus 100) to be sent to the means, and a prize ball signal (main prize ball signal) including information on the number of prize balls determined to be paid out with the winning of the gaming ball in a predetermined prize area. Of the gaming machine The external information output means (game control apparatus 100) to output to the unit, and the external information output means determines whether the state signal output from the payout control means can start the payout control or not The output of the winning ball signal is performed regardless of.

  In addition, even if the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) generates a power failure and returns from the power failure, the prize ball command is immediately issued even if the status signal indicates that payout control can be started. Is not transmitted to the payout control means (the payout control device 200), and the winning ball command is issued in response to the state in which the state signal indicates that the payout control can be started continues for a predetermined period. It will be transmitted to the payout control means.

  In addition, the game control means (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the award ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) capable of storing information on the award ball command and the information on the award ball signal (main award ball signal). A ball signal counter (game control apparatus 100) is provided, and the prize ball command transmission means (game control apparatus 100) has a predetermined winning area (start winning hole 36, normal fluctuation winning device 37, general winning hole 35, special fluctuation) The winning ball command is generated on the basis of one winning to the winning device 38), and one winning ball command is paid out when the status signal indicates that the payout control can be started. The game ball command counter (game control apparatus 100) can store information on the winnings in units of one winning on a predetermined winning area, and can play the game on the predetermined winning area. Ball winning The number of award ball commands not transmitted can be stored by updating in response to the transmission to the award ball command to the payout control means, and the external information output means is configured to perform predetermined winnings. It is configured to accumulate the number of winning balls determined to be paid out with the game ball to the area, and to output a winning ball signal to the outside of the gaming machine every time the accumulated value reaches a predetermined number, and the winning ball signal counter The information of the winning can be stored on the basis of one winning in a predetermined winning area, and the game ball is updated at the time of winning in a predetermined winning area, and the number of winning balls by the external information output means is accumulated. By updating in accordance with the processing, it is possible to store the number of winning balls that have not been subjected to the accumulation processing.

[Random number update process 1]
FIG. 15 shows the random number update process 1 (step S106) in the timer interrupt process. The random number update process 1 is a process for updating an initial value (start value) of a big hit symbol random number, a small hit symbol random number, a hit random number, and a hit symbol random number which is an object of the initial value random number update processing. In the random number updating process 1, first, it is determined whether or not the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S211).
If the jackpot symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; N), it is determined whether the small hitting symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214). If the jackpot symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S211; Y), the jackpot symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S212), and the next initial value of the jackpot symbol random number loaded corresponds The start value of the random number counter (random number area) to be set is set in a register (start value setting register) that holds the start value (step S213). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S214).

  If the small hit symbol random number is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; N), it is determined whether or not the random number for the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217). If the small hit symbol random number is waiting for the initial value setting (step S214; Y), the small hit symbol initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S215), and the next initial initial of the loaded small hit symbol random number A value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S216). After that, it is determined whether or not the random number in the general drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S217).

  When the hit random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; N), it is determined whether the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220). If the random number per block is waiting for the initial value setting (step S217; Y), the initial value random number is loaded as the next initial value (step S218), and the next initial stage of the random number per block is loaded The value is set in the register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S219). Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the hit symbol random number in the common drawing is waiting for the next initial value (start value) setting (step S220).

  If the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is not waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; N), the random number updating process 1 is ended. Also, if the hit pattern random number in the common drawing is waiting for the initial value setting (step S220; Y), the next initial value is loaded with the initial symbol random value (step S221), and The next initial value is set in a register (start value setting register) for holding the start value of the corresponding random number counter (random number area) (step S222), and the random number updating process 1 is ended.

[Random number update process 2]
FIG. 16 shows the random number updating process 2 (step S107) in the timer interrupt process. The random number updating process 2 is a process of updating a variation pattern random number for determining a variation pattern in the variation display game of the special figure 1 and the special figure 2. In the gaming machine of this embodiment, there are 1 byte random number (variation pattern random numbers 2 and 3) and 2 byte random number (variation pattern random number 1) as fluctuation pattern random numbers, and both random update processing 2 Each time an interrupt occurs, the update target is switched and processed. Furthermore, when the random number to be updated is 2 bytes, the update process is performed at different interrupts for the upper byte and the lower byte. That is, updating of 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1 (random number for reach variation mode determination) by random number updating process 2 executed in one interrupt process for main process is performed for either upper 1 byte or lower 1 byte. Are configured to

In the random number update process 2, first, the random number update scan counter for specifying in order which random number of the plurality of random numbers to be updated is to be the target of the current update process is updated (step S231). In the case of the present embodiment, the value of the random number update scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Then, when the value of the random number update scan counter is “0”, the variation pattern random number 1 (upper) is updated, when “1”, the variation pattern random number 1 (lower) is updated, and when “2” The pattern random number 2 is updated, and when it is "3", the variation pattern random number 3 is updated. Next, the address of the effect random number update table corresponding to the value of the random number update scan counter is calculated (step S232).
Next, the upper limit judgment value of the random number is acquired from the table referenced based on the calculated address (step S234). In the table referred to at this time, the upper limit judgment value for each kind of random number, that is, a value for judging whether or not the random number has made a round is stored.

  Subsequently, for example, the CPU used as a gaming microcomputer in the present embodiment is not provided with a refresh register (hereinafter referred to as "R register") used for refreshing DRAM etc. In addition, although the counter "M1 counter" which operates in the same manner as the R register is built in, the value of the M1 counter is loaded (step S234). The randomness can be given randomness by using the value of the M1 counter. Next, a mask value for masking the value of the M1 counter is obtained, and the value of the M1 counter is masked (step S235). The mask value is the number of bits different depending on the random number to be updated, for example, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter when updating the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1, and the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 Is updated, the lower 4 bits of the M1 counter are set. This is because the upper limit value is different depending on the type of random number. When the lower 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated as the mask value, the lower 3 bits of the M1 counter is updated. When the upper 1 byte of the fluctuation pattern random number 1 is updated, the lower order of the M1 counter is updated. Although 4 bits are illustrated, the numerical value is an example and is not limited thereto.

  Next, it is determined whether the random number area (random number counter) to be updated is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S236). Then, if the random number area is the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; Y), the value left by masking the value of the M 1 counter with the mask value as the added value Is set as a mask update value obtained by adding “1” to “masked value”, and the lower 1 byte is set to “0” (step S 237), and the process proceeds to step S 239. If the random number area is not the upper 1 byte of the 2-byte random number (step S 236; N), the upper 1 byte is set to “0” as the addition value, and the lower 1 byte is set to the mask update value ( The process proceeds to step S239). The reason for adding "1" to the masked value is that the masked value may become "0", and adding "0" later does not change from the value before addition, so to avoid it. is there.

  Then, it is determined whether the random number area to be updated is a 2-byte random number (step S239). If it is a 2-byte random number (step S239; Y), the value (2-byte) of the random number area to be updated is set (step S240). ), Go to step S242. If the random number area to be updated is not a 2-byte random number (step S239; N), “0” is set as the upper 1 byte of the random number value, and the value of the random number area to be updated as the lower 1 byte of the random value (1 A byte is set (step S241), and the process proceeds to step S242.

  In step S 242, a value obtained by adding the addition value determined in step S 237 or S 238 to the random number value is set as a new random number value, and it is determined whether this new random value is larger than the upper limit judgment value acquired in step S 233 (step S243). Then, if the new random number value is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; N), the new random number value is saved in a lower random number area of 1-byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245). If the new random number value is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step S243; Y), a value obtained by subtracting the upper limit judgment value from the new random number value is taken as a new random number again (step S244). The data is saved in a lower random number area of byte random number or 2-byte random number (step S245).

Next, it is determined whether the updated random number area is a 2-byte random number (step S246), and if it is not a 2-byte random number (step S246; N), the random number updating process 2 is ended. If the random number is a 2-byte random number (step S246; Y), the new random number value (when a new random number is calculated again) is saved in the high-order random number area of the 2-byte random number (step S247). And the random number updating process 2 ends.
In the case of this embodiment, the upper limit judgment value, the mask value of the M1 counter, and the type information of the random number area to be updated (1-byte random number, 2-byte random number (upper), 2-byte random number (lower)) on the effect random number update table. The address of the update area, etc. is defined for the type of random number to be updated (4 blocks).

  As described above, the CPU 111A updates the fluctuation pattern random number for determining the fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation display game of the special drawing 1 and the special drawing 2. Therefore, the CPU 111A determines the variation mode (variation pattern) of the special figure variation display game among various random numbers extracted based on the detection of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal variation winning apparatus 37. It is a random number updating means for updating the fluctuation pattern random number for

[Prize port switch / status monitoring process]
FIG. 17 shows the winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108) in the timer interrupt process. In this winning opening switch / status monitoring process, first, the winning opening monitoring table 1 corresponding to one big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S301), and the high winning opening Even though the key is not open, the fraud & prize monitoring process (step S302) is executed to monitor whether the prize winning opening has an illegal prize and to detect a normal prize.

  In the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit indicating the position of data for determining whether there is an input on the target switch, a lower address of fraud monitoring information, a lower address of a fraud winning number area, a fraud winning error notification command, a fraud winning The information of the number upper limit value (the number of irregularities judged), the address of the winning opening switch table, and the notification timer update information (permission / update) is defined. In addition to the number of repetitions of monitoring (number of switches) in the winning table of the winning opening monitoring table, a monitoring switch bit, lower address of winning number counter area 1, winning number counter area 2 for each switch. The lower address information of is defined. The winning opening monitoring table is prepared for each of the switches to be monitored.

  After that, the winning opening monitoring table 2 corresponding to the other big winning opening switch 38a in the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is prepared (step S303), and it is monitored whether there is an incorrect winning and normal winning is achieved. The fraud & prize monitoring process (step S304) to detect is performed.

  Next, prepare the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (starting opening 2 switch 37a) in the general public (step S305), and monitor whether there is an incorrect winning and detect the normal winning while the fraud & winning monitoring process (Step S306) is executed. Then, the winning opening monitoring table of the winning opening switch (for example, the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the winning opening switch 35a of the general winning opening 35) which does not need the fraud monitoring process is prepared (step S307), and the number of winnings is updated. A counter update process (step S308) is performed.

  Next, a state scan counter for specifying in order which switch or signal of the plurality of switches whose state should be monitored and which signal is to be the target of the current monitoring is updated (step S309). In the case of the present embodiment, the state scan counter is updated in the range of 0 to 3. Thereafter, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 1 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S310). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S311) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the status scan counter in the gaming machine status monitoring table 1, when the value of the status scan counter is “0”, a switch abnormality is output when a connector of the switch is disconnected or the like. The monitoring of the state based on one signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the shoot ball out switch signal from the payout control device 200 is set. When the value of the status scan counter is “2”, monitoring of the status based on the overflow switch signal is set, and when the value of the status scan counter is “3”, monitoring of the status based on the payout abnormality status signal is configured. Ru.

  Next, in accordance with the value of the state scan counter, the gaming machine state monitoring table 2 for setting the state to be monitored is prepared (step S312). Then, a gaming machine state check process (step S313) is performed to determine whether or not an error has occurred.

  In the case of the present embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 2, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", it is based on the signal output from the glass frame open detection switch 63. The monitoring of the state is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is “1”, the monitoring of the state based on the signal output from the main body frame opening detection switch 64 is set. Moreover, when the value of the state scan counter is "2", monitoring of the state based on the frame radio wave illegal signal is set, and when the value of the state scan counter is "3", monitoring of the state based on the touch switch signal is It is set.

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the status scan counter is "0" (step S314). If the value of the error scan counter is not "0" (step S314; N), the winning opening switch / status monitoring process is performed. finish. In this case, there is no monitoring target of the state in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 to be referred to next. If the value of the error scan counter is "0" (step S314; Y), the gaming machine state monitoring table 3 is prepared (step S315), and the gaming machine determines whether or not an error has occurred. A state check process (step S316) is performed.

  In the case of this embodiment, by referring to the value of the state scan counter in the gaming machine state monitoring table 3, when the value of the state scan counter is "0", a switch abnormality is output due to the occurrence of connector disconnection or the like of the switch. Monitoring of the state based on two signals is set. The gaming machine status monitoring table 3 is not defined when the status scan counter is "1" to "3".

  Thereafter, a payout busy signal check process (step S317) is performed to check a payout busy signal indicating whether the payout control device 200 can start payout control, and the winning opening switch / state monitoring process is ended. Note that the processing in steps S315 to S317 is executed only when the value of the status scan counter updated at each timer interrupt is “0”, so that it is executed at a rate of once every four timer interrupts. Become. That is, when the timer interrupt is performed every 4 ms, the processes of steps S315 to S317 are performed every 16 ms.

[Incorrect & prize monitoring process]
FIG. 18 shows the fraud & prize monitoring process (steps S302, S304, and S306) in the above-described prize hole switch / state monitoring process. This fraud & prize monitoring process is a process performed on each of the two big winning opening switches 38a of the special variation winning device 38 and the starting opening 2 switch 37a of the normal variation winning device 37. The detection of winnings is easy for the large winnings opening (special variation winning device 38) and the Fuden (normal variation winning device 37) because the opening and closing members are forcibly opened to insert the game balls and the award balls are paid out. In addition to the monitoring of fraud.

  In this fraud & prize monitoring process, first, the fraud monitoring period flag of the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is checked (step S 321), and it is determined whether it is during the fraud monitoring period (step S 322). The fraud monitoring period is a period other than the special game state in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened when the winning hole switch targeted for error monitoring is the large winning hole switch 38a, and the winning hole switch for error monitoring is started In the case of the mouth 2 switch 37a, it is a period other than the state in which the opening control of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is being executed based on the hit of the drawing.

  Then, if it is a fraud monitoring period (step S322; Y), it is determined whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323). If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (Step S323; N), the target notification timer update information is loaded (Step S332). If there is an input on the target winning opening switch (step S323; Y), the target number of incorrect winnings is updated by +1 (step S324), and the number of updated incorrect winnings is equal to or greater than the number of monitoring targets. It is determined whether there is any (step S325).

In the case of this embodiment, regardless of the type of winning opening switch subject to error monitoring, the number of fraud determination determinations is set to five, but the number of unauthorized occurrences defines a different number for each type of winning opening switch. It can also be done.
For example, when the winning opening in the open state is converted to the closing state, the gaming ball is caught in the door member of the winning opening, and the gaming ball is in the effective period of the winning opening switch. The reason is that it is not to judge that the signal is illegitimate if the player has won a prize or the signal has a noise, and it is not so easy to judge it as an error although it is not illegitimate.

  Then, if the number of fraudulent winnings is not equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (Step S325; N), a winning opening monitoring table of the target winning opening switch is prepared (Step S330). If the number of fraudulent prizes is equal to or more than the number of fraudulent occurrences to be monitored (step S325; Y), the number of fraudulent prizes is limited to the number of fraudulent occurrences (step S326). (For example, 60000 ms) is saved (step S327). Next, a target fraudulent generation command is prepared (step S328), a fraudulent prize occurrence flag is prepared as a fraudulent flag (step S329), and the prepared fraudulent flag is compared with the value of the target fraudulent flag area (step S340). ).

  On the other hand, if the fraud monitoring period is not underway (step S322; N), the winning hole monitoring table of the target winning hole switch is prepared (step S330), and the winning number counter update process (step S331) for setting the winning balls is performed. Do. Then, the target notification timer update information is loaded (step S332), and it is determined whether or not the update permission of the notification timer is permitted (step S333). Then, when the update of the notification timer is not permitted (step S333; N), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. When updating of the notification timer is permitted (step S333; Y), if the target notification timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step S334). The minimum value of the notification timer is set to zero.

  Updating of the notification timer is permitted when the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is one big winning opening switch 38a, and is not permitted when the winning hole switch subject to error monitoring is the other big winning opening switch 38a. As a result, the notification timer is updated twice as frequently as the incorrect notification about the special variation winning device 38, and it is prevented that the time is up in half of the specified time (for example, 60000 ms). When the winning opening switch subject to error monitoring is the starting opening 2 switch 37a, updating of the notification timer is always permitted.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the value of the notification timer is 0 (step S335), and if the value is not 0 (step S335; N), that is, time is not up, the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the value is 0 (step S335; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, prepare the target fraud release command (step S336) and set the fraud recovery flag as a fraud flag. Prepare (step S337). Then, it is determined whether it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S338).

  If it is the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; Y), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the current fraud & prize monitoring process, the target number of wrong prizes is cleared ( Step S339), compare the prepared fraud flag with the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340). Also, if it is not the moment when the value of the notification timer becomes 0 (step S 338; N), that is, if the value of the notification timer becomes 0 in the previous fraud & prize monitoring process, the prepared fraud flag is targeted The value of the incorrect flag area is compared (step S340).

  Then, when the prepared fraud flag matches the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; Y), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. If the prepared fraud flag does not match the value of the target fraud flag area (step S340; N), the prepared fraud flag is saved in the target fraud flag area (step S341), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step S 342), the fraud & prize monitoring process is ended. Through the above processing, an error notification command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 with the occurrence of an error, and an incorrect prize error cancellation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 along with the release of the error, and the start and end of the error notification are set. It will be done.

[Winning number counter update processing]
FIG. 19 shows winning number counter updating processing (steps S308 and S331) in the above-described winning opening switch / status monitoring processing and fraud & winning monitoring processing. In this winning number counter update process, first, the number of winning opening switches to be monitored is obtained from the winning opening monitoring table (step S 351), and whether there is an input (accurate change in input) to the target winning opening switch It determines (step S352).

  If there is no input on the target winning opening switch (step S352; N), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). If the target winning opening switch has an input (step S352; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 1 is loaded (step S353), and the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S354). It is determined whether it overflows (step S355). When no overflow occurs (step S355; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 1 (step S356), and the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). ). If an overflow occurs (step S355; Y), the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S357). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S354, the counter for winning balls (delivery command transmission) is updated. The counter size is 2 bytes (range 0-65535).

  After the value of the target winning number counter area 2 is loaded (step S 357), the loaded value is updated by +1 (step S 358), and it is determined whether the overflow occurs (step S 359). When no overflow occurs (step S359; N), the updated value is saved in the winning number counter area 2 (step S360), and the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361). It is determined whether monitoring of all the switches has ended (step S362). If an overflow occurs (step S359; Y), the table address is updated to the address of the next record (step S361), and it is determined whether monitoring of all switches is completed (step S362). In the case of the present embodiment, in step S358, the counter for the main winning ball signal is updated. The counter size is 1 byte (range 0-255).

  If monitoring of all the switches has not ended (step S362; N), the process returns to the process (step S352) of determining whether there is an input on the target winning opening switch. When the monitoring of all the switches is completed (step S362; Y), the winning number counter updating process is ended. As a result of the above processing, the winning number counter areas 1 and 2 are updated based on the winning on the winning area, and the information on the winning is stored.

[Pachislot machine state check process]
FIG. 20 shows the gaming machine state check process (steps S311, S313, S316) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In this gaming machine state check process, first, a state monitoring table corresponding to the state scan counter is obtained (step S371), and it is determined whether a signal to be monitored is on (step S372).

  Information corresponding to the state scan counter is defined in the state monitoring table (the gaming machine state monitoring table prepared in the winning hole switch / state monitoring process). As this information, for example, the lower address of the head address of the status monitoring area, the lower address of the port input status area of the switch control area where the target signal information is stored, mask data for extracting only the bits of the target signal Judgment data of ON, state OFF command (make error notification end command in case of error system), state ON command (make error notification start command in case of error system), state OFF monitoring timer comparison value, state ON monitoring timer Contains the comparison value.

  If the target signal is not on (step S372; N), the state off flag is prepared as the state flag (step S373), and the state off command of the object is acquired and prepared (step S374). Thereafter, the target state-off monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S 375), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S 379). If the target signal is not on (step S 372: N), it is a state indicating that the error signal is not an error (is normal), and is a state indicating that the signal from the touch switch is not touched. is there.

  On the other hand, when the target signal is on (step S372; Y), the state on flag is prepared as the state flag (step S376), and the state on command of the target is acquired and prepared (step S377). Thereafter, the target state on monitoring timer comparison value is acquired (step S378), and the value of the target signal control area is compared with the current signal state (step S379). The case where the target signal is on (step S 372; Y) is a state indicating that the error signal is an error (abnormal or incorrect), and that the signal from the touch switch is touched. Is a state showing

  If the value of the target signal control area matches the state of the current signal (step S379; Y), that is, if the state of the signal has not changed, the target state monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S382) It is determined whether the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383). If the value of the target signal control area does not match the state of the current signal (step S379; N), that is, if the state of the signal changes, the current signal state is saved in the target signal control area Step S380). Then, the target status monitoring timer is cleared (step S 381), the target status monitoring timer is updated by 1 (step S 382), and it is determined whether the target status monitoring timer value is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value ( Step S383).

  If the value of the target state monitoring timer is not equal to or more than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; N), the gaming machine state check processing is ended. If the value of the target state monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S383; Y), the state monitoring timer is updated by -1 and the comparison value is kept at -1 (step S384). The status flag thus compared is compared with the value of the target status flag area (step S385).

  Then, when the prepared state flag and the value of the target state flag area match (step S385; Y), the gaming machine state check process is ended. If the prepared state flag does not match the value of the target state flag area (step S385; N), the prepared state flag is saved in the target state flag area (step S386), and the rendering command setting process is performed. Then (step S387), the gaming machine state check process is ended. As a result, the state off command prepared in step S374 or the state on command prepared in step S377 is transmitted to the effect control device 300.

[Discharge busy signal check process]
FIG. 21 shows the payout busy signal check process (step S317) in the above-mentioned winning opening switch / state monitoring process. In the payout busy signal check process, first, it is determined whether the payout busy signal input from the payout control device 200 is on (step S391). The payout busy signal is turned on when the payout control device 200 can not start the payout control.

  If the payout busy signal is on (step S391; Y), a busy state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S392), and an on determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S393), It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). If the payout busy signal is not on (step S391; N), an idle state flag is prepared as a state flag (step S394), and an off determination monitoring timer comparison value (for example, 32 ms) is set (step S395) It is determined whether the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396). This makes it possible to check whether the same state continues for a plurality of timer interrupts.

  If the value of the busy signal state area does not match the state of the current signal (step S396; N), the state of the current signal is saved in the busy signal state area (step S397), and the busy signal monitoring timer is cleared to 0. (Step S398), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399). If the value of the busy signal state area matches the state of the current signal (step S396; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by +1 (step S399).

  Next, it is determined whether the value of the busy signal monitoring timer is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value set in step S393 or step S395 (step S400). If it is not greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; N), The payout busy signal check process ends. Also, if it is equal to or greater than the monitoring timer comparison value (step S400; Y), the busy signal monitoring timer is updated by -1 and kept at the value of comparison value -1 (step S401) to prepare in step S392 or step S394. The status flag is saved in the payout busy signal flag area (step S402), and the payout busy signal check process is ended.

  By this processing, the busy signal status is set based on the payout busy signal. At this time, even if the state of the payout busy signal changes, the busy signal status is not changed immediately, and the busy signal status is changed when the changed state continues over the signal determination time, and the noise is changed. It is hard to be influenced by

  In addition, since the busy signal status is cleared when the power is turned on, the busy signal status is not set and is in an undefined state until any signal state continues for the signal determination time. As a result, when a power failure occurs and returns from the power failure, the payout control device 200 immediately outputs the winning ball command even if the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started is output from the payout control device 200. And the payout ball command is sent to the payout control device 200 in response to the status signal indicating that the payout control can be started from the payout control device 200 is continuously output for a predetermined period. It will be sent. As a result, the payout control device 200 receives the winning ball command and reliably recognizes that the payout processing can be performed immediately, and then the winning ball command is transmitted, and the payout control corresponding to the winning ball command is performed. You can prevent it from being

[Special figure game processing]
Next, the details of the special figure game process (step S109) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the special view game process, the monitoring of the input of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a, the control of the entire processing related to the special view variation display game, and the setting of the display of the special view are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 22, in the special view game process, first, a starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) is performed to monitor winning of the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a. In the starting opening switch monitoring process, when there is a winning of the game ball in the starting winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37 forming the second starting winning opening, various random numbers (big hit random numbers etc.) are extracted, A game result prior determination is performed in which the game result based on the winning is determined in advance before the start of the figure variation display game.

  Next, the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) is performed. In the special winning opening switch monitoring process, processing is performed to monitor the detection of the gaming ball at the special winning opening switch 38a provided in the special variation winning device 38.

  Next, if the special figure game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step A3). In addition, the minimum value of the special figure game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4). If the value of the special figure game processing timer is "0" (step A4; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, reference is made to branch to the process corresponding to the special figure game process number. The special figure game sequence branch table to be set is set in the register (step A5), and the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the special figure game process number is acquired using the table (step A6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the special figure game process number (step A7).

At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "0", the variation start of the special figure variation display game is monitored, and the setting of the variation start of the special figure variation display game, the setting of the effect, the special figure variation A special drawing routine processing (step A8) is performed to set information necessary for performing processing.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "1", the special figure variation process which performs setting of the stop display time of the special figure, setting of information necessary for performing the special figure display process, etc. (Step A9) is performed.

  If the special figure game processing number is "2" at step A7, and if the game result of the special figure variation display game is a big hit, the setting of the fanfare command according to the type of the big hit, the big winning opening of each big hit The special chart display process (step A10) is performed to set the fan fare time according to the release pattern, set the information necessary for performing the fan fare / interval process, and the like.

If the special figure game processing number is "3" at step A7, the setting of the opening time of the special winning opening and the updating of the number of times of opening, the setting of information necessary for performing the special winning opening opening process, etc. A fanfare / interval process (step A11) is performed.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "4", while the big hit round is not the final round, while setting the interval command, the processing of setting the ending command when the final round, the big winning opening remaining A special winning opening open process (step A12) is performed to set information necessary for ball processing.

If the special figure game processing number is "5" in step A7, if the big hit round is the final round, the process for setting the time for the remaining balls in the big winning opening to be discharged, the big hit end processing A special winning opening remaining ball process (step A13) is performed to set information necessary for the execution.
If the special figure game process number is "6" in step A7, a big hit end process (step A14) is performed to set information necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

In step A7, when the special figure game processing number is “7”, to set the opening time and opening pattern of the big winning opening when the small hit occurs, to set the fanfare command, to perform the small hit middle processing A small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) is performed to set necessary information.
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "8", the small hitting middle process (step A16) is performed to set the ending command and the information necessary for performing the small hitting residual ball processing, etc. .
At step A7, when the special figure game processing number is "9", a process for setting a time for discharging the remaining ball that has won in the big winning opening during the small hit middle process, a small hit end process The small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the above.
At step A7, when the special figure game process number is "10", small hit ending process (step A18) is performed to set information etc. necessary for performing the special figure routine process.

  Thereafter, after preparing a table for controlling the fluctuation of the special view 1 display 51 (step A19), the symbol variation control process (step A20) related to the special view 1 display 51 is performed. And after preparing the table for controlling the fluctuation of the special figure 2 display 52 (step A21), the symbol variation control processing (step A22) concerning the special figure 2 display 52 is performed, and the special figure game processing is ended. Do. On the other hand, if the value of the special figure game processing timer is not "0" at step A4 (step A4; N), that is, if the time is not up, the process proceeds to step A19 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

  Note that the small hit is a result mode without the operation of the condition device, and the big hit is a special result with the operation of the condition device. The condition device is operated when a big hit occurs in the special view variation display game (big hit symbol stop display). When the condition device is activated, for example, a big hit occurs and it is special as a special motorized role. It means that a specific flag for operating the fluctuation winning device 38 continuously is set (the character continuous operating device is operated). If the condition device does not operate, it means that the above-mentioned flag is not set as in the case of winning a small hit lottery, for example. The "condition device" may be software means such as a flag turned on / off by software as described above, or hardware means such as a switch turned on / off electrically. In addition, "condition device" is a term generally used in the field of pachinko machines as a device whose operation is required for continuous operation of a motorized accessory, and the same applies in this specification as well. It is used as a term that has a meaning.

[Starting port switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the starting opening switch monitoring process (step A1) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 23, in the starting opening switch monitoring process, first, the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36), a prize monitoring table is prepared (step A101), and hard random number acquisition processing (step A102) is performed. (1) It is determined whether or not there is a winning on the starting opening (step A103).
When it is determined in step A103 that there is no winning on the first starting opening (step A103; N), the process proceeds to step A109, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A103 that there is a winning on the first starting opening (step A103; Y), it is determined whether or not the special drawing time is short (during general public support) (step A104). ).

If it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is not short (step A104; N), the process proceeds to step A107, and the subsequent processes are performed.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A104 that the special drawing time is short (step A104; Y), a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. . That is, if it is a time saving state, regardless of the probability state of the special figure fluctuation display game, a right-handed command notification command is prepared (step A105), and effect command setting processing (step A106) is performed. In the case of the gaming machine 10 according to the present embodiment, the player does not win the prize unless the player strikes the left at the first starting opening (start winning opening 36), and does not win the prize unless the player normally strikes the normal fluctuation winning device 37. Therefore, in the time saving state, the game state in which the right hitting is more advantageous than the left hitting is advantageous, but there is a win in the first starting opening during the time saving state (that is, the left hitting in the time saving state) In addition, the presentation control device 300 is configured to send a right-handling instruction notification command to the effect control device 300 and perform notification (warning) instructing to perform a right-handling operation.
Next, after preparing a table for setting information on suspension by the first start port (start winning port 36) (step A107), the special view start port switch common process (step A108) is performed.

Next, prepare a second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37) prize monitoring table (step A109), perform hard random number acquisition processing (step A110), and whether or not there is a winning to the second starting opening It determines (step A111).
If it is determined in step A111 that there is no winning on the second starting opening (step A111; N), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A111 that there is a winning on the second starting opening (step A111; Y), the ordinary electric winning combination (normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37) is in operation, ie, normal fluctuation If it is determined whether or not the winning device 37 is activated and the gaming ball is in an open state in which winning of the gaming ball is possible (step A112), and it is determined that the ordinary electric role is in operation (step A112; Y), It transfers to the process of A114 and performs the process after it. On the other hand, if it is determined in step A112 that the ordinary motor-operated combination is not in operation (step A112; N), it is determined whether a common electric charge fraud is occurring (step A113).

  In the determination as to whether or not the general electric power fraud is occurring, it is determined that the fraud is occurring when the number of fraudulent prizes to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is equal to or more than the fraud occurrence judgment number (for example 5). In the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the gaming ball can not be won in the closed state, and the gaming ball can be won only in the open state. Therefore, when the gaming ball wins in the closed state, it is a case where some abnormality or injustice occurs, and when there is a gaming ball winning in such a closed state, the number is counted as the number of fraudulent winnings. Then, when the number of incorrect winnings thus counted is equal to or more than a predetermined number (upper limit value), it is determined that the fraud is in progress.

  If it is determined in step A113 that no ordinary power transmission is occurring (step A113; N), a table for setting information on suspension by the second starting port (normal fluctuation winning device 37) is prepared (step A114). The figure starting opening switch common processing (step A115) is done, it ends starting opening switch supervision processing. If it is determined in step A113 that a general power transmission fraud is occurring (step A113; Y), the starting opening switch monitoring process is ended. That is, the second start memory is prevented from being generated further.

[Hard random number acquisition processing]
Next, the details of the hard random number acquisition process (steps A102 and A110) in the above-described start port switch monitoring process will be described. As shown in FIG. 24, in the hard random number acquisition process, first of all, of the first start opening (start winning opening 36) and the second start opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), no prize information of the starting opening to be monitored The setting is made (step A121), and it is determined whether there is an input to the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a (step A122). Then, when there is no input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; N), the hard random number acquisition process is ended. On the other hand, if there is an input to the start port switch to be monitored (step A122; Y), the random number latch register status is read (step A123), and it is determined whether latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124). .

  If there is no latch data in the target random number latch register (step A124; N), that is, if no random number is extracted, the hard random number acquisition processing is ended. When latch data is present in the target random number latch register (step A124; Y), the extracted jackpot random number is loaded and prepared in the hard random number latch register to be monitored (step A125). Then, among the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) and the second starting opening (normal fluctuation winning device 37), the winning presence information of the starting opening to be monitored is set (step A126), hard random number acquisition processing finish.

[Special figure starting port switch common processing]
Next, the details of the special view starting port switch common process (steps A108 and A115) in the above-described starting port switch monitoring process will be described. The special view starting opening switch common processing is processing that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 25, in the special view starting opening switch common processing, first, information on the number of winnings on the starting opening switch to be monitored among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is Load the starting opening signal output count which is the number of outputs to the external management device (step A131), update the loaded value by +1 (step A132), and determine whether the output count overflows (step A133) ). If the number of outputs does not overflow (step A133; N), the updated value is saved in the start aperture signal output number area of RWM (step A134), and the process proceeds to step A135. On the other hand, when the number of times of output overflows (step A133; Y), the process proceeds to step A135. In the present embodiment, values from “0” to “255” can be stored in the start opening signal output frequency area. When the loaded value is “255”, the value after updating becomes “0” by +1 updating, and it is determined that the number of times of output overflows.

  Next, it is determined whether the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations (starting storage) corresponding to the monitored starting opening switch among the starting opening 1 switch 36a and the starting opening 2 switch 37a is less than the upper limit (step A135). If the number of to-be-updated holdings to be updated is not less than the upper limit value (step A135; N), the special drawing starting opening switch common processing ends. In addition, when the number of to-be-updated special figure reservations is less than the upper limit (step A135; Y), the number of to-be-updated special figures (number of specially-designated 1 reservations or specially-designated number 2) is updated +1 Step A136) Save the target starting opening winning flag (Step A137). Subsequently, the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the number of start ports to be monitored and the number of special views reserved is calculated (step A138), and the big hit random number prepared in step A125 is saved in the big hit random number storage area of RWM Step A139). Next, the jackpot symbol random numbers of the starting opening switch to be monitored are extracted and prepared (step A140), and saved in the jackpot symbol random number storage area of the RWM (step A141).

Next, it is determined whether or not it is a winning on the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A142).
If it is determined in step A142 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A142; N), the process proceeds to step A145.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A142 that the first starting opening has been won (step A142; Y), small hit symbol random numbers are extracted and prepared (step A143), RWM small hit symbols It saves in the random number storage area (step A144).

Next, the variation pattern random numbers 1 to 3 are saved in the variation pattern random number storage area of the corresponding RWM (step A145), and the special figure holding information determination process (step A146) is performed.
Then, prepare a decoration special view reservation number command corresponding to the start opening switch to be monitored and the special view reservation number (step A 147), perform the rendering command setting process (step A 148), and execute the special view start aperture switch common process. finish.

  Here, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the game ball in the start winning opening 36 and the starting area of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and starts the right to execute the variable display game. A starting storage means is provided for storing a predetermined number as the upper limit as storage. Further, the start storage means (game control device 100) sets various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball to the first start winning opening (start winning opening 36) as the first start storage with the predetermined number as the upper limit. It stores and stores various random number values extracted based on the winning of the game ball on the second starting winning opening (normal variation winning device 37) as a second starting memory with a predetermined number as the upper limit.

[Special map reservation information determination process]
Next, the details of the special view hold information determination process (step A146) in the above-mentioned start port switch common process will be described. The special view reservation information determination process is a prefetch process for determining the result related information corresponding to the start storage prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game based on the corresponding start storage.

As shown in FIG. 26, first, the starting opening winning flag saved in step A137 is checked to determine whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A151).
If it is determined in step A151 that it is not a winning to the first starting opening (step A151; N), the process proceeds to step A154.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A151 that a winning on the first starting opening has been won (step A151; Y), it is determined whether the special drawing time is short (step A152).

When it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is short (step A152; Y), the special figure hold information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A152 that the special figure time is not short (step A152; N), it is determined whether the jackpot is medium or small hit (step A153).
If it is determined in step A153 that the jackpot is in the middle or the small hit (step A153; Y), the special map reservation information determination process is ended.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A153 that the big hit or small hit is not in progress (step A153; N), it is determined whether or not the big hit is based on whether the big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value. A big hit determination process (step A154) is performed. Then, if the determination result is a big hit (step A155; Y), set a big hit symbol random number check table corresponding to the target starting opening switch (step A156), and correspond to the big hit symbol random number prepared in step A140. The stop symbol information is acquired (step A157), and the process proceeds to step A164.

On the other hand, if the determination result is not a big hit (step A155; N), it is determined whether it is a winning to the first starting opening (starting winning opening 36) (step A158).
If it is determined in step A158 that it is not a winning on the first starting opening (step A158; N), stop symbol information of the release is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if it is determined in step A158 that the first starting opening has been won (step A158; Y), the big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not A small hit determination process (step A159) to determine whether or not to perform. Then, if the determination result is not a small hit (step A160; N), the stop symbol information of the removal is set (step A163), and the process proceeds to step A164.
On the other hand, if the determination result is a small hit (step A160; Y), a small hit symbol random number check table is set (step A161), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the small hit symbol random number prepared in step A143 It acquires (step A162), and it transfers to the process of step A164.

  Then, a prefetch stop symbol command corresponding to the target starting opening switch and stop symbol information is prepared (step A164), and effect command setting processing is performed (step A165). Next, special figure information setting processing (step A166) for setting special figure information which is a parameter for setting a variation pattern is performed, and variation pattern setting process for setting a variation aspect of the special figure variation display game is performed (step A 167).

  Thereafter, a look-ahead fluctuation pattern command corresponding to the first half fluctuation number indicating the first half fluctuation pattern and the second half fluctuation number indicating the second half fluctuation pattern in the fluctuation pattern of the special view fluctuation display game is prepared (step A168), and rendering command setting processing is performed. (Step A <b> 169) The special-image hold information determination process ends. The special figure information setting process in step A166 and the variation pattern setting process in step A167 are the same as the process executed at the start of the special figure variation display game in the special figure routine process.

  With the above processing, the prefetch pattern command including the result of the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory of the prefetch target and the prefetch fluctuation pattern command including the information of the fluctuation pattern in the special pattern fluctuation display game based on the start memory are prepared And sent to the effect control device 300. Thereby, the effect control of the result related information (whether or not a big hit or the type of fluctuation pattern) corresponding to the start memory is performed before the start timing of the special view fluctuation display game based on the corresponding start memory. The player can be notified of the result related information prior to the start timing of the special view variation display game by changing the decoration special view start memory display that can be notified to the device 300, in particular, displayed on the display device 41. It becomes possible to notify.

  That is, the game control device 100 determines a random number stored as a start memory in the start winning memory storage means (game control device 100) before execution of the variable display game based on the start memory (for example, whether a special result is obtained (Determine whether or not etc.) Make pre-judging means. It should be noted that the time when the random number value stored corresponding to the starting memory is determined in advance is not only at the time of the starting winning combination where the starting memory is generated but any time before the variable display game based on the starting memory is played Good.

[Big winning opening switch monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening switch monitoring process (step A2) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 27, in the special winning opening switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "4", that is, whether the special winning opening is being processed (step A201). . When the special winning opening open process is being performed (step A201; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening is not being processed (step A201; N), it is determined whether the value of the special drawing game processing number is "5", that is, the special winning opening residual ball processing is in progress (step A202).
If the special winning opening game is being processed (step A202; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the special winning opening game is not being processed (step A205; N), it is determined whether the value of the special figure game processing number is "8", that is, the small hit is being processed (step A203). ).
If the small hit is being processed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205. If the small hit is not being processed (step A203; N), it is determined whether the value of the special process game processing number is "9", that is, the small hit remaining ball processing is being performed (step A204).
Since the special figure game process number does not shift next until the special figure game process timer becomes “0”, it is possible to check the progress of the game by the special figure game process number.

If the small hit residual ball processing is not in progress (step A 204; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended. If the small hit residual sphere process is being performed (step A204; Y), the process proceeds to step A205.
Then, "0" is set to the winning counter (step A205), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 1 (one big winning opening switch 38a) (step A206).

  If there is no input on the special winning opening switch 1 (step A206; N), it is determined whether there is an input on the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 38a) (step A210). When the special winning opening switch 1 has an input (step A206; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A207), and effect command setting processing (step A208) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A209), and it is determined whether there is an input to the special winning opening switch 2 (the other special winning opening switch 38a) (step A210).

  If there is no input to the special winning opening switch 2 (step A210; N), it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214). When the special winning opening switch 2 has an input (step A210; Y), a special winning opening count command is prepared (step A211), and effect command setting processing (step A212) is performed. Then, the winning counter is updated by +1 (step A213), and it is determined whether the value of the winning counter is 0 (step A214).

When the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A268), if the value of the winning counter is "0" (step A214; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended.
If the value of the winning counter is not "0" (step A214; N), it is determined whether or not the special winning opening remaining ball processing is in progress (step A215).
When the special winning opening residual ball processing is under (step A215; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring processing is ended, and when the special winning opening residual ball processing is not under (step A215; N), the small hitting residual ball processing It is determined whether it is medium (step A216).
If small ball remaining ball processing is being performed (step A 216; Y), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended, and if small ball remaining ball processing is not being performed (step A 216; N), the value of the winning counter (1 or 2) is added to the special winning opening count (step A217), and it is determined whether the special winning opening count has reached the upper limit (the number of game balls that can be won in one round, for example, "9") (step A 218).

  When the special winning opening count is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step A218; N), the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. If the special winning opening count is equal to or higher than the upper limit (step A218; Y), the special winning opening count is kept at the upper limit (step A219), and the special view game processing timer area is cleared to 0 ( Step A220) It is determined whether the small hit is being processed (step A221). If the small hit is not under process (step A221; N), the big winning opening switch monitoring process is finished, and if the small hit is under processing (step A221; Y), the big hit opening control pointer area is small hit. The value of the opening operation end is saved (step A222), and the special winning opening switch monitoring process is ended. As a result, the special winning opening is closed and one round ends.

[Special figure usual processing]
Next, details of the special view routine processing (step A8) in the special view game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 28, in the special view ordinary processing, first, it is determined whether the number of special view 2 reservations (second start storage number) is "0" (step A301). If it is determined that the special figure 2 pending number is "0" (step A301; Y), it is determined whether the special figure 1 pending number (first start storage number) is "0" (step A306). Then, if it is determined that the special figure 1 reservation number is "0" (step A306; Y), it is determined whether the customer waiting demo is started (step A311), and the customer waiting demo is not started (step A311) A311; N) sets the waiting for customer demonstration flag in the waiting for customer demonstration flag area (step A312).

  Subsequently, a customer waiting demo command is prepared (step A313), rendering command setting processing (step A314) is performed, special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step A315) is performed, and special processing normal processing is ended. . That is, when it is possible to start the special view variation display game but the start condition is not satisfied, the customer waiting demo command forming the standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300. On the other hand, when the customer waiting demo has been started in step A311 (step A311; Y), the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A315) is performed, and the special figure ordinary process is ended.

Also, if the special figure 2 reservation number is not "0" in step A301 (step A301; N), the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) is performed, and the decorative special figure corresponding to the special figure 2 reservation number A reserve number command is prepared (step A303), and effect command setting processing (step A304) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing of special drawing 2 (step A305) is performed, and the special drawing processing is ended.
Also, if the special drawing 1 reservation number is not "0" at step A306 (step A306; N), the special drawing 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) is performed, and the decorative special drawing corresponding to the special drawing 1 reservation number A number-of-holds command is prepared (step A308), and effect command setting processing (step A309) is performed. Then, the processing for setting transition to special processing during special drawing 1 of special drawing 1 (step A310) is performed, and the special drawing processing is ended.

  As described above, the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is performed when the special figure 2 pending number is not “0” by checking the special figure 2 pending number before the special figure 1 pending number check. Will be executed. That is, the second special view variation display game is executed with priority over the first special view variation display game. That is, when the game control device 100 has the second start memory in the second start memory means (game control device 100), the variable display game based on the second start memory is the variable display based on the first start memory It is a priority control means that is executed prior to the game.

[Special figure normal process shift setting process 1]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 1 (step A 315) in the above-mentioned special view ordinary process and the special view routine process shift setting process 1 (step A 741) in the special figure display process described later will be described. As shown in FIG. 29, in the special figure ordinary process shift setting process 1, first, "0" related to the special figure ordinary process is set as the process number (step A321), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area. (Step A322), the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A323). Then, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A324), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Special figure 1 change start processing]
Next, the details of the special view 1 fluctuation start process (step A307) in the special view normal process described above will be described. The special figure 1 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the first special figure fluctuation display game. As shown in FIG. 30, first, a special figure 1 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, special figure 1) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A331) A big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information to the big hit flag 1 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A 333) according to the setting of the special figure 1 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A334) is performed to prepare a special figure 1 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to the setting of the fluctuation pattern of the first special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A335). Thereafter, fluctuation pattern setting processing (step A 336) for setting the fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect in the first special view fluctuation display game is performed, and fluctuation start information setting processing for setting information of fluctuation start of the first special drawing fluctuation display game (Step A337) is performed, and the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Special figure 2 fluctuation start processing]
Next, the details of the special figure 2 fluctuation start process (step A302) in the above special figure normal process will be described. The special figure 2 fluctuation start process is a process performed at the start of the second special figure fluctuation display game, and the same process as that of the special figure 1 fluctuation start process shown in FIG. It is done as.

  As shown in FIG. 31, first, the special figure 2 fluctuation flag indicating the type of the special figure fluctuation display game to be executed (here, the special figure 2) is saved in the fluctuation symbol discrimination area (step A341). A big hit flag 2 setting process (step A 342) is performed to set deviation information and big hit information in the big hit flag 2 for determining whether or not the display game is a big hit.

  Next, after performing the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) according to the setting of the special figure 2 stop symbol (pattern information), the special figure information which is the parameter for setting the fluctuation pattern is set. An information setting process (step A344) is performed to prepare a special figure 2 fluctuation pattern setting information table which is a table in which information for referring to various information related to setting of the fluctuation pattern of the second special drawing fluctuation display game is set. (Step A345). Thereafter, a fluctuation pattern setting process (step A346) for setting a fluctuation pattern which is a fluctuation aspect in the second special figure fluctuation display game is performed, and a fluctuation start information setting process for setting information on fluctuation start of the second special figure fluctuation display game (Step A347) is performed, and the special figure 2 fluctuation start process is ended.

[Big hit flag 1 setting processing]
In FIG. 32, the big hit flag 1 setting process (step A332) in the above-mentioned special figure 1 fluctuation start process was shown. In the big hit flag 1 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the small hit flag area (step A 351), and the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 1 area (step A 352). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A353), and the special figure 1 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 To do (step A354). The one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 1). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A355) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is a big hit (step A356; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 1 area in which the outlier information was saved in step A352 (step A357) ), The big hit flag 1 setting process is ended. On the other hand, if the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A355) is not a big hit (step A356; N), whether the prepared big hit random number value is a small hit depending on whether it matches the small hit determination value or not Small hit determination processing (step A 358) for determining

  Then, if the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is a small hit (step A 359; Y), the small hit information is saved by overwriting the small hit information in the small hit flag area saved with the out information in step A 351 (Step A360), the big hit flag 1 setting processing ends. On the other hand, when the determination result of the small hit determination process (step A 358) is not the small hit (step A 359; N), the big hit flag 1 setting process is performed while saving the outlier information in the big hit flag 1 area and the small hit flag area. finish. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the first special view variation display game is one of “big hit”, “small hit”, and “deterioration”.

[Big hit flag 2 setting processing]
In FIG. 33, the big hit flag 2 setting process (step A342) in the above-mentioned special figure 2 fluctuation start process was shown. In this big hit flag 2 setting process, first, the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2 area (step A371). Next, a big hit random number is loaded from the RWM special view 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) and prepared (step A372), and the special figure 2 big hit random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (Step A372). It should be noted that the one for reserve number is an area for storing information (random numbers and the like) about the special drawing start storage whose digestion order is the earliest (here, the first in the special figure 2). Thereafter, a big hit determination process (step A 374) is performed to determine whether the prepared big hit random number value matches the big hit determination value or not according to whether it is a big hit.

  If the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is a big hit (step A 375; Y), the big hit information is overwritten and saved in the big hit flag 2 area saved with the out information in step A 371 ), And the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended. On the other hand, when the determination result of the big hit determination process (step A 374) is not a big hit (step A 375; N), the big hit flag 2 setting process is ended while the shift information is saved in the big hit flag 2. As described above, in the present embodiment, the result of the second special view variation display game is either “big hit” or “losing”.

[Big hit judgment processing]
FIG. 34 shows the big hit determination process (steps A154, A355, A374) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, the big hit flag 1 setting process and the big hit flag 2 setting process. In the jackpot determination process, first, the lower limit judgment value of the jackpot judgment value is set (step A381), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is less than the lower judgment value (step A382). Note that being a big hit means that the big hit random number matches the big hit judgment value. The jackpot determination value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the jackpot random number is not less than the lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the jackpot judgment value and not more than the upper judgment value which is the upper limit value of the big hit judgment value. , Determined to be a big hit.

If the value of the jackpot random number is less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 387), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A382; Y), Since it is a small hit or a drop, "other than a big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is less than the lower limit determination value (step A 382; Y) Therefore, "other than big hit (out)" is set as the determination result (step A387).
If the value of the jackpot random number is not less than the lower limit judgment value (step A 382; N), it is determined whether the state is a high probability state (step A 383).

  Then, if it is in the high probability state (step A383; Y), the upper limit judgment value in the high probability is set (step A384), and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386). ). If the state is not the high probability state (step A383; N), the upper limit judgment value in the low probability is set (step A385), and it is judged whether the value of the target jackpot random number is larger than the upper judgment value (step A386) .

If the value of the jackpot random number is larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; Y), a deviation is set as the judgment result (step A 357), and the big hit judgment processing is ended. Specifically, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 355) in the big hit flag 1 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), Since it is a hit or a drop, "other than big hit (small hit or drop)" is set as the determination result (step A387). On the other hand, if the big hit determination process is the big hit determination process (step A 374) in the big hit flag 2 setting process, if the value of the big hit random number is larger than the upper limit determination value (step A 386; Y), it is an off As the determination result, "other than big hit (out)" is set (step A387).
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the upper limit judgment value (step A 386; N), that is, if it is a big hit, a big hit is set as the judgment result (step A 388), and the big hit judgment processing is ended.

[Small hit judgment processing]
FIG. 35 shows small hit determination processing (steps A159 and A358) in the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination processing and the big hit flag 1 setting processing. In this small hit determination process, first, a small hit lower limit judgment value is set, and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is smaller than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391). In addition, small hit determination is performed using the same random number (big hit random number) as the big hit determination. That is, being a small hit means that the big hit random number matches the small hit judgment value. The small hit judgment value is a plurality of consecutive values, and the big hit random number is equal to or higher than the small hit lower judgment value which is the lower limit value of the small hit judgment value, and the small hit upper limit which is the upper limit value of the small hit judgment value. If it is less than the determination value, it is determined that the small hit. Of course, the range of the big hit judgment value and the range of the small hit judgment value are set so as not to be covered.

If the value of the big hit random number is less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; Y), that is, if it is a loss, a hit is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not less than the small hit lower limit judgment value (step A391; N), the small hit upper limit judgment value is set and it is judged whether the value of the target big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (Step A392).

If the value of the big hit random number is larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; Y), that is, if it is a disconnection, a gap is set as the judgment result (step A393), and the small hit judgment processing is ended.
If the value of the big hit random number is not larger than the small hit upper limit judgment value (step A392; N), that is, if it is a small hit, a small hit is set as the judgment result (step A394) and the small hit judgment processing is ended. Do.

[Special figure 1 stop symbol setting process]
FIG. 36 shows the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process (step A333) in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process described above. In this special figure 1 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A401), and if it is a big hit (step A401; Y), the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A402). Next, the special figure 1 big hit symbol table is set (step A403), the stop symbol number corresponding to the loaded big hit symbol random number is acquired and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A404). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 1 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A405), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A406). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 1 display 51) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit value information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit value information area (step A 407), the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A408), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A409). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. In the case of the present embodiment, the rendering mode shifts in response to a hit, and the transition destination of the rendering mode, which shifts after an end, changes in accordance with the type of the hit symbol (type of big hit symbol or small hit). In addition, if it becomes a specific big hit symbol (for example, 4R probability variation symbol) among the big hit in the special figure 1, depending on whether or not the game state is in a definite change, the transition destination's effect mode will be a definite change definite It is determined whether to shift to a rendering mode in which it is difficult to distinguish whether the rendering mode is a definite variation or not. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit (step A401; N), it is determined whether the small hit flag is a small hit (step A410). A small hit symbol random number is loaded from the symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) (step A411). Next, the special figure 1 small hit symbol table is set (step A412), the stop symbol number corresponding to the small hit symbol random number loaded is acquired, and saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A413).
Thereafter, the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A414), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is saved (step A415). Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A418).

  If the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A410; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 1 stop symbol number area (step A416), the off stop symbol pattern is in the stop symbol pattern area Save (step A417), and prepare a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern (step A418). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A419), and effect command setting processing (step A420) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A421), and the special figure 1 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A422) The small hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A423), and the special figure 1 stop symbol setting process is ended.

[Special figure 2 stop symbol setting processing]
FIG. 37 shows the special figure 2 stop symbol setting process (step A343) in the special figure 2 change start process described above. In this special view 2 stop symbol setting process, first, it is determined whether the big hit flag 2 is a big hit (step A 431). If it is a big hit (step A 431; Y), the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (number of reservations 1) ) And the jackpot symbol random number is loaded (step A432). Next, the special figure 2 big hit design table is set (step A433), the stop design number which corresponds to the big hit design random number which is loaded is acquired, it saves in the special figure 2 stop design number territory (step A434). This process selects the type of special result.

  Thereafter, the special figure 2 big hit stop symbol information table is set (step A435), the stop symbol pattern corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the stop symbol pattern area (step A436). The stop symbol pattern is for setting a stop symbol on the special view display (here, the special view 2 display 52) or a stop symbol on the display device 41. Next, the round number upper limit information corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired and saved in the round number upper limit information area (step A 437), and the time shortening determination data corresponding to the stop symbol number is acquired, and the time shortening determination is made. The data is saved in the data area (step A438), and the effect mode transition information corresponding to the stop symbol pattern and the probability state is saved (step A439). These pieces of information are for setting the execution mode of the special game state and the effect mode after the end of the special game state. Further, in the case of the present embodiment, in the big hit in the special figure 2, it becomes a dedicated effect mode in which the effect mode of the transfer destination becomes a definite variation determination regardless of which big hit symbol. Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 442).

  On the other hand, when the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit (step A431; N), the stop symbol number at the time of disconnection is saved in the special figure 2 stop symbol number area (step A440), the off stop symbol pattern is saved in the stop symbol pattern area Then, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is prepared (step A 441). By the above processing, the stop symbol corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is set.

  Thereafter, the decoration special drawing command is saved in the decoration special drawing command area (step A443), and a rendering command setting process (step A444) is performed. The decoration special drawing command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 later. Then, the symbol data corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step A445), and the special figure 2 big hit symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step A446). 2 Stop symbol setting processing ends.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 executes the first variation display game as the variation display game (based on the first start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball at the first start winning opening (the starting winning opening 36), Based on the detection of the game ball at the second start winning opening (normal change winning device 37) (based on the second start memory) to form a game execution means to execute the second variable display game as a variable display game. Further, the game control device 100 constitutes game execution means for controlling the execution of the variable display game based on the determination result by the determination means (game control device 100).

[Special map information setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reservation information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special view information setting process (steps A166, A334, A344) in the special view 2 change start process will be described. In the case of this embodiment, the probability state (low / high probability, presence / absence of time reduction) does not affect the distribution of the change, and the effect mode managed by the game control apparatus 100 affects the distribution of the change. In the effect mode, one effect mode is set from a plurality of effect modes in accordance with the probability state, the presence or absence of a time saving state, the progress status of the special view variation display game, and the like.

As shown in FIG. 38, in the special view information setting process, first, the former half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A451), and the former half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the rendering mode information is acquired (step A452).
Then, the first half variation group selection offset table is set (step A453), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A454).
Next, the former half variation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A455), and the value obtained by the addition is saved in the variation distribution information 1 area (step A456). As a result, in the variable distribution information 1 area, the variable distribution information 1 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 1 is a table pointer for distributing the first half fluctuation (the fluctuation mode before the start of reach), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, although depending on the specifications of the model, since the fluctuation time is shortened only when the number of reservations is large, it is only in the case of loss, and as a result, the number of reservations does not affect the distribution of the first half fluctuation. The fluctuation group includes a plurality of fluctuation patterns. When determining the fluctuation pattern, first, the fluctuation group is selected, and one fluctuation pattern is selected from the fluctuation groups. ing.

Then, the second half fluctuation group selection pointer table is set (step A457), and the second half fluctuation group selection pointer corresponding to the effect mode information is acquired (step A458).
Then, the second half fluctuation group selection offset table is set (step A459), and the offset data corresponding to the target special drawing reservation number and the stop symbol pattern is acquired (step A460).
Then, the latter half fluctuation group selection pointer and the offset data are added (step A461), the value obtained by the addition is saved in the fluctuation distribution information 2 area (step A462), and the special figure information setting process is ended. As a result, in the variable distribution information 2 area, the variable distribution information 2 generated based on the type of stop symbol, the number of reservations, and the effect mode is saved. The fluctuation distribution information 2 is a table pointer for distributing the latter half fluctuation (including the type of reach (including no reach)), and is used later to select a fluctuation group. However, the reach occurrence rate changes according to the number of reservations only in the case of an outfall (the reach incidence rate decreases when the number of reservations is large). Does not affect

[Variation pattern setting process]
Next, the details of the above-mentioned special view reserve information determination process, special view 1 change start process, and special pattern 2 change start pattern change process (steps A167, A336, A346) will be described. In addition, the fluctuation pattern is the first half fluctuation pattern which is the fluctuation aspect from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game to the reach state, and the second half fluctuation which is the fluctuation aspect from the reaching state to the end of the special figure fluctuation display game The second half fluctuation pattern is set first, and then the first half fluctuation pattern is set.

  As shown in FIG. 39, in the fluctuation pattern setting process, first, the fluctuation group selection address table is set (step A 471), and the address of the second half fluctuation group table corresponding to the fluctuation distribution information 2 is acquired and prepared (step A472) Load and prepare the variation pattern random number 1 from the target variation pattern random number 1 storage area (for holding number 1) (step A 473). In the present embodiment, the structure of the second-half fluctuation group table is different in structure between a hit and a break. Specifically, it has a 1-byte size for hit and a 2-byte size for release. Since the rate of occurrence per hit is lower than the rate of occurrence of departure and even one byte is sufficient, the footprint is one byte in size from the viewpoint of saving of data capacity. Therefore, the hit time uses only the lower value of the 2-byte fluctuation pattern random number 1. In addition, the rate of occurrence of outliers is higher than the incidence rate of hits, and in order to make various renditions appear, the size for the removal is 2 bytes.

  Then, it is judged whether or not the result of the special figure fluctuation display game is disapproval (step A 474). If it is disapproval (step A 474; Y), 2-byte distribution processing (step A 475) is carried out and Transfer to processing. If not (step A474; N), the distribution process (step A476) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A477.

  Then, the address of the second half variation selection table obtained as a result of the distribution is acquired and prepared (step A 477), and the variation pattern random number 2 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 2 storage area (for holding number 1), Prepare (step A 478). Then, distribution processing (step A 479) is performed, and the latter half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired and saved in the latter half fluctuation number area (step A 480). By this process, the second half fluctuation pattern is set.

  Next, the first half fluctuation group table is set (step A 481), and a table selection pointer is calculated based on the fluctuation distribution information 1 and the second half fluctuation number (step A 482). Then, the address of the first half variation selection table corresponding to the calculated pointer is acquired and prepared (step A483), and the variation pattern random number 3 is loaded from the target variation pattern random number 3 storage area (for the number of holdings 1). To do (step A 484). Thereafter, distribution processing (step A485) is performed, the first-half fluctuation number obtained as a result of distribution is acquired, and saved in the first-half fluctuation number area (step A486), and the fluctuation pattern setting processing is ended. By this processing, the first half fluctuation pattern is set, and the fluctuation pattern of the special figure fluctuation display game is set. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes a variation pattern setting unit that sets a variation pattern, which is an execution mode of a game, from a plurality of patterns.

[Variation start information setting process]
Next, the details of the fluctuation start information setting process (steps A337 and A347) in the above-mentioned special drawing 1 fluctuation start process and special drawing 2 fluctuation start process will be described. As shown in FIG. 40, in the change start information setting process, first, the random number storage area of the target change pattern random numbers 1 to 3 is cleared (step A491). Next, the first half fluctuation time value table is set (step A492), and the first half fluctuation time value corresponding to the first half fluctuation number is acquired (step A493). Further, the second half fluctuation time value table is set (step A494), and the second half fluctuation time value corresponding to the second half fluctuation number is acquired (step A495).

  Then, the former half fluctuation time value and the latter half fluctuation time value are added (step A 496), and the addition value is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 497). Thereafter, the variation command (MODE) corresponding to the first half variation number is prepared (step A 498), the variation command (ACTION) corresponding to the second half variation number is prepared (step A 499), and rendering command setting processing is performed (step A 500). ). Next, the special figure reservation number corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is updated by -1 (step A501), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag is set (step A502). Next, the random number storage area is shifted (step A503), the free space after the shift is cleared (step A504), and the fluctuation start information setting process is ended.

  Information on the start of the special view variable display game is set by the above process. That is, the game control device 100 constitutes a determination means for determining various random number values stored in the start storage means (game control device 100). Further, the game control apparatus 100 forms a variation pattern determination unit capable of determining a variation pattern of identification information to be executed in the variation display game based on the determination information of the start memory.

  And start information which is information about a start of these special figure change display games is transmitted to production control device 300 later, and in production control device 300, it was decided based on reception of information about a start of a special figure change display game. The detailed effect contents in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game are set according to the fluctuation pattern, and the decoration special figure fluctuation display game is started. The start information, which is information about the start of these special view variation display games, includes an ornament special drawing reservation number command including information on a decrease in the number of starting memories (number of reservations), an ornament special view command including information on a stop pattern, The variation command including information on the variation pattern of the figure variation display game and the stop information command including information on extension of the stop time may be mentioned, and the commands are transmitted to the effect control device 300 in this order. In particular, by transmitting the decoration special drawing command earlier than the change command, the process in the effect control device 300 can be efficiently advanced. The start information, which is information related to the start of the special view variation display game, is at least one of the decoration special drawing reserve number command, the decoration special view command, the change command, and the stop information command related to the decrease in the number of starting memories. good. In addition, any command other than these commands may be used as long as the information is related to the start of the special figure variation display game.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 1)]
FIG. 41 shows the processing for setting transition to a process during special figure variation in the special figure normal process (special figure 1) (step A310). In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 1), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A511), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A512).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A513), and a signal relating to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A514). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 1 fluctuation control flag area (step A515), and select the initial value of the blinking control timer in the special figure 1 blinking control timer area Here, 52 ms) is set (step A 516), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 1) is ended.

[Process transition setting process during special figure fluctuation (special figure 2)]
FIG. 42 shows the processing for setting transition to processing of special processing during special processing during special processing (special drawing 2) (step A305). In the special figure variation process transition setting process (special figure 2), first, "1" is set as the process number (step A521), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A522).

  Then, the customer waiting demonstration flag area is cleared (step A523), and a signal related to the start of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, the special symbol 2 fluctuating signal ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A524). After that, save the in-fluctuating flag in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A525), the initial value of the blinking control timer (special figure 2 indicator 52 blink timer) in the special figure 2 blinking control timer area Here, 104 ms) is set (step A 526), and the special processing during process transition setting processing (special drawing 2) is ended.

[Process during special figure change]
Next, the details of the special figure changing process (step A9) in the special figure game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 43, in the special figure variation processing, first, a symbol stop command corresponding to the variation symbol determination flag (special figure 1 variation flag or special figure 2 variation flag) is prepared (step A601). A process is performed (step A602). That is, a symbol stop command forming stop information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game being executed ends and the result is derived and displayed. In response to the reception of the symbol stop command, the effect control device 300 stops the variation display of the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game, and displays the result as a stop.

Thereafter, the display time corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is set (step A603), and the set display time is saved in the special-purpose game processing timer area (step A604). In the case of the present embodiment, the display time is set to 600 ms as the display time regardless of whether the stop design pattern is a removal design pattern, a big hit design pattern or a small hit design pattern, but the display time may be different depending on the stop design pattern. .
Subsequently, the processing for setting transition to special processing is set (step A605), and the processing to display special drawing is ended. That is, the game control apparatus 100 constitutes stop time setting means for setting the stop time for displaying the stop result mode of the variable display game.

[Process transition setting process during special map display]
FIG. 44 shows the processing for setting the processing shift during processing for a special view being displayed (step A605) in the processing for the special view fluctuation described above. In the special figure display process transition setting process, first, the process number "2" related to the special figure display process is set (step A611), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A612).

  Next, save the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 1 (for example, the special symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A613), the signal related to the end of fluctuation of the special figure 2 (for example, special symbol 2) Save the fluctuation signal in the test signal output data area (Step A614), and start the control timer in the control signal area for the number of times the symbol is determined according to the number of times the special figure fluctuation display game for output is output to the external information terminal. A value (for example, 256 ms) is saved (step A615). Thereafter, as information for controlling the special view 1 change display game in the special view 1 display 51, the stop flag relating to the change stop in the special view 1 display 51 is saved in the special view 1 change control flag area (step A616) Save the stop flag related to the fluctuation stop on the special figure 2 display 52 as information for controlling the special figure 2 fluctuation display game on the special figure 2 display 52 in the special figure 2 fluctuation control flag area (step A617), Special processing during process transition setting processing ends.

[Process while displaying special map]
Next, the details of the special view display process (step A10) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 45 and FIG. 46, in the special figure display process, first, the small hit flag set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process is loaded (step A 701). The small hit flag area is cleared (step A702).
Next, the big hit flag 1 set in the big hit flag 1 setting process in the special figure 1 fluctuation start process and the big hit flag 2 set in the big hit flag 2 setting process in the special figure 2 fluctuation start process are loaded (Step A703) A process (Step A704) of clearing the big hit flag 1 area and the big hit flag 2 area of the RWM is performed. Then, it is judged whether the big hit flag 2 loaded is a big hit (step A 705) and when it is determined that it is a big hit (step A 705; Y), the start of the big hit (special figure 2 big hit) of the second special view fluctuation display game Save the test signal for the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal is ON, the commodity continuous operation device operating signal is ON, the special symbol 2 signal is ON) in the test signal output data area of the RWM (step A 708), A round number upper limit table is set (step A709).

  On the other hand, if it is determined in step A705 that the big hit flag 2 is not a big hit as a result of checking the big hit flag 2 (step A 705; N), it is determined whether the loaded big hit flag 1 is a big hit (step A706) and a big hit (step A706; Y), the test signal (for example, the condition device operating signal ON, the feature continuous operation device operating signal ON) regarding the start of the big hit (special feature 1 big hit) of the first special figure fluctuation display game, The special symbol 1 signal is turned on) is saved in the test signal output data area of RWM (step A 707), and the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709) is performed.

  After performing the process of setting the round number upper limit table (step A 709), the round number upper limit ("16" or "4" in this embodiment) corresponding to the round number upper limit information is acquired, and the RWM is acquired. The number of rounds is saved in the upper limit value area of (step A710). Subsequently, the round LED pointer corresponding to the round number upper limit value information is acquired and saved in the round LED pointer area of the RWM (step A711).

  Next, a decoration special drawing command corresponding to the stop symbol pattern is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area of the RWM, prepared (step A712), and effect command setting processing (step A713) is performed. After that, a probability information command is prepared according to the information that makes the probability of becoming a hit result in the common drawing fluctuation display game and the special drawing fluctuation display game a normal probability state (low probability state) (step A714). (Step A715) is performed. Subsequently, a fanfare command corresponding to the symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern) set in the special view 1 or special view 2 stop symbol setting process is prepared (step A716), and the effect command setting process (step A716) Do A717). The fanfare command forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

  Next, the information corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the probability of being hit in the common view variation display game and the special view variation display game is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step A718). In the case of the present embodiment, in step A 718, two jackpots and three jacks are saved as signals corresponding to the special winning opening open information and the state of probability. In addition, each ON / OFF is decided by the state of the special winning opening opening information and the probability. For example, the big hit 2 signal is ON if the big hit with popped out (big prize opening opening information is other than the big winning opening opened information 1), the big hit without popping out (so-called, 確 certain big hit etc. Large winning opening open If the information is a large winning opening opening information 1), it will be ON if it is a big hit in the time saving state, and it will be OFF otherwise. In addition, the jackpot 3 signal is ON when the jackpot is a jackpot with some balls, and is OFF when the jackpot is a jackpot without balls.

  After that, the big hit opening information and the big hit fanfare time (for example, 5000 ms, 4700 ms, 7700 ms or 300 ms) corresponding to the probability of being hit in the common view change display game and the special view change display game The setting is made (step A719), and the set big hit fanfare time is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A720). Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A721). As a result, information on the probability state and time saving state of the special view when the special result occurs is stored. Then, the effect mode after the end of the special game state is determined based on the information stored later.

  Then, the large winning a prize opening fraud winning number area of the special winning a prize opening (the special fluctuation winning a prize device 38) which corresponds to the special winning a prize opening opening information is cleared (step A722) The fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the mouth fraud monitoring period flag area (step A723). Thereafter, fanfare / interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended. That is, the special game in which the game control device 100 converts the special fluctuation winning device 38 into the open state based on the result being a special result in any of the first special view fluctuation display game and the second special view fluctuation display game. It is a special game state generating means that generates a state.

On the other hand, if the big hit flag 1 is not a big hit in step A706 (step A706; N), it is determined whether the loaded small hit flag is a small hit (step A725).
If it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is a small hit (step A 725; Y), the high probability change number updating process (step A 726), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 727) ) To determine whether the probability state of the special figure variation display game is a high probability state (step A728).

  If it is determined in step A728 that the special drawing high probability is not found (step A728; N), the decoration special drawing command is loaded from the decoration special drawing command area and prepared (step A729), and the effect command setting The process (step A730) is performed. Next, a small hit fanfare command is prepared (step A731), an effect command setting process (step A732) is performed, and the process proceeds to step A733. This small hit fanfare command also forms special game state start information transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the special game state.

If it is determined in step A728 that the high probability of the special view is being reached (step A728; Y), the process proceeds to step A733. As described above, in the gaming machine 10 of the present embodiment, when the probability state of the special figure variation display game is the high probability state, the big winning opening is opened by the occurrence of the small hit, but the occurrence of the small hit is played In order not to make the person conscious, the screen displayed on the display device 41 is not changed.
Then, the special figure game mode flag is loaded, and the loaded flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag save area (step A733). Thereafter, the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) is performed, and the special figure display process is ended.

On the other hand, if it is determined in step A 725 that the small hit flag is not a small hit (step A 725; N), the high probability change number updating process (step A 735), the effect mode information check process related to setting of the effect mode (step A 736) is performed to set the switching preparation remaining rotation number corresponding to the rendering mode number (step A737), and it is determined whether the rendering remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738). Note that the switching preparation remaining rotational speed may be a different value (rotational speed) in all the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes, or the same value in any of the rendering modes of the plurality of rendering modes (Number of rotations) may be used, or the same value (number of rotations) may be used in all of the effect modes among the plurality of effect modes.
When it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation speed and the switching preparation remaining rotation speed do not match (step A 738; N), special figure normal processing shift setting processing 1 (step A 741) is performed, and special drawing display Finish the middle process.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step A 738 that the effect remaining rotation number and the switching preparation remaining rotation number match (step A 738; Y), the effect mode switching preparation command is prepared (step A 739). After the processing (step A740) is performed, special processing shift processing setting processing 1 (step A741) is performed, and the processing of displaying the special drawing is ended. The effect mode switching preparation command is a command for preventing the pre-reading effect from being performed several revolutions before the effect mode is switched, and the effect mode switching preparation command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 to cross the mode. So that there is no contradiction.

[High probability change frequency update processing]
Next, the details of the high probability variation number updating process (steps A 726 and A 735) in the above-mentioned special figure display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 47, in the high probability change number of times update process, first, it is determined whether it is in the special figure high probability (during the high probability state) (step A751). If it is not in the special figure height probability (step A 751: N), the high probability change number of times update process is ended. If the special figure high probability is in progress (step A 751; Y), the high probability fluctuation number is updated by −1 (step A 752), and it is determined whether the high probability fluctuation number becomes “0” (step A 753 ).

If the high probability fluctuation number is not "0" (step A753; N), the high probability fluctuation number updating process is ended. Also, when the high probability fluctuation number becomes "0" (step A753; Y), the high probability notification flag area is cleared (step A754), and a signal related to the high probability end (for example, 2 signals for the big hit is turned off) ) Is saved in the external information output data area.
Then, signals regarding the end of the high probability state and the time saving state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time saving state signal is OFF, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area. In addition, since there is a state of "high probability & time reduction" and a state of "high probability & time reduction none", even the special drawing high probability, only the probability state changes, so the ordinary symbol 1 fluctuation time reduction state signal and The ordinary electric role 1 open extension state signal is always off.

Next, save the number with no time saving in the game state display number area (step A757), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A758), and make special drawing in the special drawing game mode flag area. The low probability & time saving none flag is saved (step A759).
Next, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) relating to the left hitting instruction in the test signal output data area (step A760), and display the LED during right hitting (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57). In order to extinguish the game, the number in the left hitting state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 761), and the high probability change number of times update process is ended.

[Demonstration mode information check processing]
Next, the details of the effect mode information check process (steps A 727 and A 736) in the above-described special view display process will be described. As shown in FIG. 48, in the effect mode information check process, first, it is determined whether the next mode shift information is a code without update (step A771). If the next mode shift information is the no update code (step A771; Y), the effect mode information check process is ended. In this case, the effect mode is not changed according to the number of special view variation display games that have been executed, and for example, the effect mode which continues until the next big hit in the high probability state is selected. .

  If the next mode transition information is not a no update code (step A 771; N), the effect remaining rotation number, which is the number of executable times of the special view variation display game until the change of the effect mode, is updated by −1 Then, it is determined whether the effect remaining number of revolutions has become "0" (step A773). If the effect remaining number of revolutions is not "0" (step A773; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the effect remaining rotation speed becomes "0" (step A773; Y), that is, if the effect mode is to be changed from the next special image variation display game, the effect mode information address table is set (step A774) The address of the table corresponding to the next mode transition information is acquired (step A775).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A776), and the effect rotation number in the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RWM It saves in the area (step A677), acquires the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted, and saves it in the next mode shift information area in the RWM (step A678). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the newly set effect mode number is prepared (step A779), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure transmission command area (step A780). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; Y), that is, if the state of the probability has not changed, the rendering mode information check process is ended.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A780; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A782), An effect command setting process (step A 782) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the newly set effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A783), and effect command setting processing (step A784) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A 785), and effect command setting processing (step A 786) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A 787), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A 787; N), the effect mode information check process is ended. If the mode is left-handed (step A 787; Y), a left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A 788), rendering command setting processing (step A 789) is performed, and rendering mode information check processing is ended. Do. As a result, it is possible to perform an effect of giving notice of switching from before the specified number of revolutions of switching of the effect mode. As described above, by managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, for example, control such as generating a specific reach can be performed only in a specific effect mode, and the interest of the game can be improved.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the fanfare / inter-interval process shift setting process 1 (step A 724) in the above-described process of displaying the special view will be described. As shown in FIG. 49, in the fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 1, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A 791), and processing is performed in the special figure game processing number area. Save the number (step A 792).

  Next, save the signal about the start of the big hit (special game state) (for example, 1 big hit signal ON (big hit + small hit output), big hit 4 signal ON (big hit output)) in the external information output data area (Step A793), a signal related to the end of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is OFF, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, special The symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is turned off, and the symbol 1 high probability state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 794). Note that, even during the special figure high probability, only the probability state changes in the ordinary drawing, so the normal symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal and the normal motorized combination 1 open extension state signal are always off. Thereafter, the number of rounds area for managing the number of rounds executed in the special gaming state is cleared (step A795), and a number without time saving is saved in the gaming state display number area (step A796). The general drawing low probability flag is saved in the area (step A 797).

  Then, the variable symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A798), and the high probability notification flag area is used to turn off the gaming state display LED (third gaming state display unit) provided on the gaming board 30 related to the display of the high probability state. Is cleared (step A799), and the special figure low probability & time saving none flag is saved in the special figure game mode flag area (step A800). Next, the probability information command (low probability) is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area for saving the command output to the effect control device 300 at the time of power failure recovery (step A801). The high probability fluctuation number area for managing the number of display games is cleared (step A802). As a result, the high probability state and the short time state are ended, and the normal probability state and the normal state are obtained.

  Thereafter, the effect mode 1 number is saved in the effect mode number area (step A 803), the effect remaining rotational speed area is cleared (step A 804), and the no update code is saved in the next mode shift information area (step A 805). . Then, save a signal (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is ON) relating to a right-handling instruction in the test signal output data area (step A806), and display LED during right-handing (for example, first gaming state display unit 57). In order to light up, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 807), and the fanfare / interval processing transition setting processing 1 is ended. As a result, the information on the effect mode is once cleared as the special gaming state occurs.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing transition setting process 1]
Next, the details of the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1 (step A734) in the special figure display process described above will be described.
As shown in FIG. 50, in the small hit fanfare medium process transition setting process 1, first, “7” for the small hit fanfare medium process is set as the process number (step A811), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. Save to the number area (step A812).

  Next, the small hit fanfare time (for example, 0.3 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 813), a signal related to the start of the small hit game (for example, one signal for big hit is ON (big hit + small hit output) ) Is saved in the external information output data area (step A 814), and a signal relating to the start of the small hit game (for example, the special symbol 1 small hit signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 815).

Next, the special winning opening illegal prize number area is cleared (step A 816), and the fraud monitoring out-of-period flag is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A 817).
Next, a signal relating to a right-handed command (fire position designation signal 1 is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A 818), and the right-handed display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) is lit. Therefore, the number in the right-handed state is saved in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A 819), and the small hit fanfare middle processing transition setting processing 1 is ended.

[Fanfare / Processing during interval]
Next, the details of the fanfare / in-interval process (step A11) in the above-described special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 51, in the fanfare / interval processing, first, the number of rounds in the special gaming state is updated by +1 (step A901), and a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special gaming state is prepared (step A902) And effect command setting processing (step A 903).

Thereafter, the special winning opening operation determination table is set (step A 904), the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening information is obtained (step A 905), and the number of rounds in the special gaming state is the obtained release switching determination. It is determined whether it is larger than the value (step A906).
If the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A 906; Y), save the special opening for short opening (for example, 0.2 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 907), A special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / in-interval processing ends.
Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A 906; N), save the special opening game opening time for long opening (for example, 29 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A 908) The special winning opening open processing transition processing setting process (step A 909) is performed, and the fanfare / in-interval processing ends.

Here, in the present embodiment, as a big hit pattern, (1) 4R, large winning opening opening information 1 (all short opening), (2) 16R, large winning opening opening information 2 (all long opening), (3) 16R, large winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4R long opening, 5 to 16R short opening), (4) 4R, large winning opening opening information 4 (all long opening), (5) 16R, large winning opening opening Information 5 (all open long), (6) 16R, big winning opening open information 6 (1-8 R long opening, 9-16 R short opening), (7) 16 R, big winning opening open information 7 (1-4 R Is set to be long open, 5 to 16 R is short open).
Therefore, in the special winning opening operation determination table, the special winning opening opening information 1 data and the opening switching determination value "0", the winning opening opening information 2 data and the opening switching determination value "16", the special winning opening The release information 3 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening opening information 4 data and the release switching determination value "4", the big winning opening release information 5 data and the opening switching determination value "16" The special winning opening opening information 6 data and the opening switching determination value “8” are stored in association with the special winning opening opening information 7 data and the opening switching determination value “4”. Then, while the number of rounds is equal to or less than the open switching determination value, the open operation is performed such that the open operation is short open when the number of rounds exceeds the open switching determination value.

[A special winning opening open process processing transition setting process]
FIG. 52 shows the process setting setting processing during large winning opening opening (step A909) in the above-mentioned fanfare / interval processing. In the special winning opening open processing transition setting process, first, set the processing number to "4" for the special winning opening opening processing (step A911), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area ( Step A 912). After that, save a signal related to the opening start of the special winning opening (for example, the special electric combination 1 operation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step A 913) and store the number of winnings on the special winning opening. The information on the winning opening count number area is cleared (step A 914). Then, the on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A915), and the special winning opening open processing transition setting processing is ended.

[Big winning opening open processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening open process (step A12) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 53, in the special winning opening open process, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state being executed and the round number upper limit value of the RWM round number upper limit area. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1001). Then, if it is not the final round (step A1001; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1002), acquire the release switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information (step A1003), It is determined whether the number of rounds in the gaming state is larger than the acquired open switching determination value (step A1004).
If the number of rounds is larger than the open switching determination value (step A1004; Y), save the remaining ball processing time (eg, 1.4 seconds) for the short closing in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1005), Prepare an interval command related to the interval between rounds (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and the special winning opening is open. End the process.

  Also, if the number of rounds is not larger than the release switching determination value (step A1004; N), save the remaining ball processing time for long closing (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1006), prepare an interval command (step A1007), perform effect command setting processing (step A1010), perform the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011), and end the special winning opening open processing Do.

  On the other hand, if it is the final round (step A1001; Y), save the final remaining ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1008), and end the special gaming state. The ending command concerning display control etc. of the ending display screen in the case is prepared (step A1009), rendering command setting processing (step A1010) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing transition setting processing (step A1011) is performed, The special winning opening open processing ends.

[Large winning hole remaining ball processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 54 shows the special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1011) in the above-mentioned special winning opening open processing. In this special winning opening residual ball processing shift setting process, first, set the processing number to "5" for the special winning opening residual ball processing (step A1021), and save the processing number in the special figure game processing number area (Step A1022). Then, in order to close the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, save the off data for turning off the special winning opening solenoid 38b in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1023) The sphere process transition setting process is ended.

[Big win mouth remaining ball processing]
Next, the details of the special winning opening remaining ball processing (step A13) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 55, in the special winning opening residual ball processing, first, the current round is compared with the current round number in the special gaming state under execution and the round number upper limit value of the round number upper limit value region of RWM. It is determined whether it is the final round (step A1101).

Then, if the current round in the special gaming state is not the final round (step A1101; N), set the special winning opening operation determination table (step A1102), and obtain the opening switching determination value corresponding to the special winning opening opening information Then (step A1103), a normal interval time (for example, 0.1 second) is set (step A1104).
Next, it is determined whether the number of rounds in the special gaming state is larger than the acquired opening switching determination value (step A1105), and if the number of rounds is larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; Y), step A1109 Transfer to processing of If the number of rounds is not larger than the opening switching determination value (step A1105; N), it is determined whether the special winning opening opening information is a rank down effect type value (step A1106).

  Here, the rank down effect is a round continuation notification effect for notifying whether or not the big hit round continues, and an effect for notifying that the big hit round is not continued in the round continuation notification effect corresponds. Specifically, as a big hit pattern, "16R, big winning opening open information 2 (all long open)" and "16R, big winning opening open information 3 (1 to 4 R long open, 5 to 16 R short open)" When any of the above is selected, a predetermined big hit round effect is displayed on the display screen of the display device 41 from 1R to 3R of the big hit round, and the round continuation informing effect is executed at the 4Rth. If the selected jackpot pattern is "16R, big winning opening open information 2 (all open long)", round continuation is notified in the round continuation notification effect, and the big winning opening is long open also in the rounds after 5R If the big hit pattern opened and selected is "16R, big winning opening opening information 3 (1 to 4 R is long opening, 5 to 16 R is short opening)", round non-continuation notification is notified in the round continuation notification effect, The big prize winning opening will be opened by short opening in the round after the 5th R eyes.

If the special winning opening information is not a rank down effect value (step A1106; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. When the special winning opening information is a rank down effect value (step A1106; Y), it is determined whether the number of rounds is a special effect round value (for example, 4R) (step A1107).
If the number of rounds is not the value of the special effect round (step A1107; N), the process proceeds to step A1109. Also, if the number of rounds is the value of the special effect round (step A1107; Y), for example, if the number of rounds is 4R, set the interval time for rank down effect (for example, 3.6 seconds) A1108), the process proceeds to step A1109. In addition, the number of special rounds is not limited to one type, and a plurality of types such as 4R and 8R may be provided.

  Then, the interval time set in step A1104 or A1108 is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1109), fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2 (step A1110) is performed, and the special winning opening residual ball processing Finish.

  On the other hand, when the current round in the special gaming state is the final round (step A1101; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area storing the effect mode when the special result is derived (step A1111), set the ending time corresponding to the loaded flag, the special winning opening opening information and the stop symbol pattern (step A1112), and set the ending time (for example, 1.9 seconds) to the special figure game processing timer area Save (step A1113). Thereafter, the big hit end process shift setting process (step A1114) is performed, and the big winning opening remaining ball process is ended.

[Fanfare / Intermediate process transition setting process 2]
FIG. 56 shows the process transfer setting processing 2 (step A1110) during fanfare / interval in the above-mentioned special winning opening residual ball processing. In this fanfare / interval processing shift setting processing 2, first, the processing number relating to the fanfare / interval processing is set (step A1121), and the processing number is saved in the special figure game processing number area (step A1122).
Next, save a signal (for example, the special electric combination 1 operating signal is OFF) relating to the opening end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) in the test signal output data area (step A1123) The middle processing shift setting processing 2 ends.

[Big hit end processing shift setting processing]
FIG. 57 shows the big hit end processing shift setting process (step A1114) in the above-mentioned big winning opening residual ball process. In the big hit end process shift setting process, first, "6" is set as the process number related to the big hit end process (step A1131), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1132). Thereafter, a signal (for example, the special electric symbol 1 in operation is OFF) relating to the open end of the special winning opening (special variation winning device 38) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1133).

  Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A1134), clear the information on the round number area storing the round number of the special gaming state (step A1135) ), Clear the information of the round number upper limit value area storing the upper limit value of the round number of the special gaming state (step A1136). Then, clear the information of the round number upper limit value information area storing the flag for upper limit value determination of the round number (step A1137), and of the special winning opening open information area storing the flag for opening information determination of the special winning opening The information is cleared (step A1138), and the big hit end process shift setting process is ended.

[Big hit end processing]
Next, details of the big hit end process (step A14) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 58, in the big hit end process, first, it is determined whether the time shortening determination data is time saving operation data (step A1201).
When it is not time saving operation data (step A1201; N), big hit end setting processing 1 is performed (step A 902), and when it is time saving operation data (step A1201; Y), big hit ending setting processing 2 is performed (step A 903) . Then, the effect mode information address table is set (step A1204), and the address of the table corresponding to the effect mode transition information set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) is acquired (step A1205).

  Next, as a process of saving information necessary for managing the effect mode in the game control apparatus 100, first, the effect mode number of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area (Step A1206). Furthermore, the effect mode rotational speed of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state is acquired, saved in the effect remaining speed area (step A1207), and the next mode of the effect mode set after the end of the special game state The transition information is acquired and saved in the next mode transition information area (step A1208).

  Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the rendering mode number is prepared (step A1209), the command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1210), and rendering command setting processing (step A1211) is performed. Here, as the probability information command, there are a plurality of commands further including information of the rendering mode in any of “high probability, time reduction” and “high probability, no time reduction”. In the case of the present embodiment, when the big hit is over, it becomes a definite change state (so-called ST state). Therefore, as a probability information command, "high probability · time short · presentation mode A", "high probability · time short · presentation mode B" There are "High probability · Time reduction · Reproduction mode C" and "High probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", which are not used in this process, but others are "Low probability · Time reduction none · Reproduction mode A", " There are low probability, no time saving, rendering mode B, and "low probability, no time saving, rendering mode C".

Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1212), and effect command setting processing (step A1213) is performed.
Next, a high probability variation frequency command corresponding to the high probability variation number is prepared (step A1214), rendering command setting processing (step A1215) is performed, and it is determined whether or not the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216) .
When the time saving state occurs after the big hit end (step A1216; Y), the special view ordinary process shift setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.
In addition, when the time saving state does not occur after the big hit end (step A1216; N), prepare the left hitting indication notification command (step A1217), perform special command setting processing (step A1218), and shift to special processing routine processing The setting process 2 is performed (step A1219), and the big hit end process is ended.

[Big hit end setting process 1]
FIG. 59 shows the jackpot end setting process 1 (step A1202) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In this big hit end setting process 1, first, a signal regarding no time saving state (for example, 2 big hit signals are turned off) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1221), a signal regarding the start of high probability state and no time saving state (For example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the special symbol 2 fluctuation time shortening state signal is OFF, the normal symbol 1 high probability The state signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1222).

  Next, save the number with no time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1223), save the common drawing low probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1224), and save the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving none flag are saved (step A1225). Thereafter, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1226), and the signal related to the left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1227), in order to turn off the right hitting display LED (the first gaming state display unit 57), save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state display number 2 area (step A1228), and the big hit end setting processing 1 Finish.

[Big hit end setting process 2]
FIG. 60 shows the jackpot end setting process 2 (step A1203) in the above-mentioned jackpot end process. In the big hit end setting process 2, first, a signal related to the start of the short time state (for example, the big hit 2 signal is ON) is saved in the external information output data area (step A1231). A signal relating to the start of the short time state is saved from inside the big hit and is saved in the external information output data area in a continuous manner. Then, a signal related to the start of the high probability state and the short time state (for example, the special symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 high probability state signal is ON, the special symbol 1 fluctuation time shortening state signal is ON, the special symbol 2 fluctuation The time reduction state signal is ON, and the normal symbol 1 high probability state signal is ON) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1232).

  Next, save the number with time saving state in the gaming state display number area (step A1233), save the common drawing high probability flag in the common drawing game mode flag area (step A1234), and in the special drawing game mode flag area. The special drawing high probability & time saving flag are saved (step A1235). After that, the initial value (for example, 100 times) is saved in the high probability fluctuation number area (step A1256), and the big hit end setting process 2 is ended. In the case of the present embodiment, the right hitting mode is set during the time saving state, but since the right hitting mode is set from the big hit, the setting regarding the right hitting is not performed in the big hit end setting processing 2.

  That is, the game control apparatus 100 forms a specific gaming state generation means capable of generating a specific gaming state (time reduction state) over a predetermined period determined in advance after the end of the special gaming state. And in the specific gaming state, while controlling the operation of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 so that the winning of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is easier than when it is not the specific gaming state, than when not in the specific gaming state The first special view variation display game, the second special view variation display game, and the common view variation display game are configured to be reduced in variation time.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting process 2]
FIG. 61 shows the special figure transition processing transition setting processing 2 (step A1219) in the above-mentioned big hit end processing. In the special view routine process transition setting process 2, first, "0" is set as the process number relating to the special figure routine process (step A1241), and the process number is saved in the special figure game process number area (step A1242) .

  After that, save the signal regarding the end of the big hit (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF, the big hit 3 signal OFF, the big hit 4 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1243), the signal about the big hit end (eg The condition device operating signal is turned off, the accessory continuous operation device operating signal is turned off, the special symbol 1 signal is turned off, and the special symbol 2 signal is turned off) is saved in the test signal output data area (step A1244). Subsequently, the information of the time reduction determination flag area is cleared (step A1245), the information of the pointer area of the round LED indicating the number of rounds of big hit is cleared (step A1246), and the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared. (Step A1247). Then, clear the information of the special view game mode flag save area (step A1248), save the flag during the injustice monitoring period in the large winning a prize opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1249), and set special processing shift processing 2 Finish.

[Small hit fanfare medium processing]
Next, details of the small hit fanfare middle process (step A15) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 62A, in the small hit fanfare medium process, a small hit, medium process shift setting process (step A1301) is performed.

[Small hitting Medium process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hit middle processing shift setting process (step A1301) in the above-described small hit fanfare medium middle processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 62 (b), in the small hitting medium process transition setting process, first, "8" for the small hit medium process is set as the process number (step A1311), and the process number is processed as a special figure game process The file is saved in the number area (step A1312).

Next, save the opening time (for example, 0.2 seconds) of the big winning opening in the small hit game in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1313), a signal regarding the start of the small hitting operation (for example, special electric role 1 During operation, the signal is turned ON) and saved in the test signal output data area (step A1314).
Subsequently, in order to open the open / close door 38c of the special variation winning device 38, on data for turning on the special winning opening solenoid 38b is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1315).
Next, clear the information on the large winning opening count number area storing the winning number to the special winning opening (step A 1316), save the small hitting operation initial value (for example, "0") in the small hitting middle control pointer area (Step A1317), the small hitting middle process transition setting process is ended.

[Small hit during processing]
Next, details of the small hit middle process (step A16) in the special view game process described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 63, in the small hitting medium process, first, the value of the small hitting medium control pointer is loaded (step A1401), and the loaded value is not less than the small hitting operation end value (for example, “6”) Is determined (step A1402).
If the loaded value is not greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; N), the small hitting middle control pointer is updated by +1 (step A1403), and the small hitting operation transition setting process (step A1404) is performed. End processing during hit.

On the other hand, if the loaded value is equal to or greater than the small hitting operation end value (step A1402; Y), the flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1405), and the loaded flag is in the special figure height probability. It is determined whether it is a flag related to (step A1406). Thereby, it is determined whether the small hit in the special figure height probability. Here, it does not matter whether or not the time saving state is in progress.
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to the special figure high probability (step A1406; Y), small hit remaining ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing is ended. Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag related to the special figure high probability (step A1406; N), prepare a small hit end screen command (step A1407), perform rendering command setting processing (step A1408), The small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing (step A1409) is performed, and the small hit middle processing ends.

[Small hit operation transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting operation shift setting process (step A1404) in the above-mentioned small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 64, in the small hitting operation shift setting process, the branching process (step A1411) is performed according to the control pointer (small hitting middle control pointer).

If the control pointer is “0”, “2” or “4” at step A1411, the wait time (eg, 1500 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1412), The off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1413), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.
If the control pointer is "1", "3" or "5" at step A1411, the special winning opening open time (for example, 200 ms) corresponding to the control pointer is saved in the special figure game processing timer area. (Step A1414) The on data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (Step A1415), and the small hitting operation shift setting process is ended.

Here, in the case of the present embodiment, after the small hit fanfare time of 300 ms, the opening of 200 ms and the closing of 1500 ms are alternately performed, and the small hit middle control pointer sequentially at the end of opening and at the end of closing It will be updated.
Specifically, at the end of the first 200 ms opening (that is, when switching from the first 200 ms opening to the first 1500 ms closing), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “0,” 1 At the end of the first 1500 ms closing (that is, when switching from the first 1500 ms closing to the second 200 ms opening), the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “1”, and the second 200 ms opening is performed. The small hit middle control pointer is updated to "2" at the end, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "3" at the end of the second 1500 ms closing, and the small hit middle control at the end of the third 200 ms open The pointer is updated to "4" and the small hit middle control pointer is updated to "5" at the end of the third 1500 ms closing. Then, at the end of the fourth 200 ms opening, the small hit middle control pointer is updated to “6”, and after the lapse of the small hit remaining ball time of 1900 ms and the small hit ending time of 100 ms thereafter, the small hit The state ends. Therefore, since it is closed for 2000 ms after the fourth 200 ms opening, the visual ending time is 2000 ms.

[Small hit residual ball processing shift setting processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing shift setting process (step A1409) in the above-described small hit middle process will be described. As shown in FIG. 65, in the small hit residual ball processing shift setting process, first, “9” for the small hit residual ball processing is set as the processing number (step A 1421), and the processing number is set to the special view game processing number Save to the area (step A1422).
Next, the small hit residual ball processing time (for example, 1.9 seconds) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1423), the off data is saved in the special winning opening solenoid output data area (step A1424), small The remaining ball processing shift setting process is ended.

[Small hit residual ball processing]
Next, the details of the small hit remaining ball processing (step A17) in the special drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 66 (a), in the small hit residual ball processing, a small hit end processing shift setting process (step A1501) is performed.

[Small hit end process transition setting process]
Next, the details of the small hitting end processing shift setting process (step A1501) in the above-mentioned small hit residual ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 66 (b), in the small hitting end process transition setting process, first, "10" according to the small hitting end process is set as the process number (step A1511), and the process number is processed as a special drawing game process. The file is saved in the number area (step A1512).

Next, the small hit ending time (for example, 0.1 second) is saved in the special figure game processing timer area (step A1513), and a signal regarding the end of the small hit operation (for example, the special electric character 1 operating signal is turned off) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1514).
Next, clear the information of the large winning opening count count area (step A1515), clear the information of the small hit middle control pointer area (for example, clear 0) (step A1516), and end the small hit end processing shift setting process .

[Small hit end processing]
Next, the details of the small hitting end process (step A18) in the above-mentioned special view game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 67, in the small hitting end process, first, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag saving area (step A1601), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag regarding special figure high probability Step A1602).
If the loaded flag is not the flag related to the special figure high probability (step A 1602; N), the effect mode information address table is set (step A 1603), and the effect mode set at the start of fluctuation (at the time of stop symbol setting) The address of the table corresponding to the transition information is acquired (step A1604).

  Then, the effect mode number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired and saved in the effect mode number area in the RWM (step A 776), the effect remaining rotation number of the effect mode to be transferred is acquired, and the effect remaining rotation number in the RAM The image data is saved in the area (step A1606), the next mode shift information of the effect mode to be shifted is acquired, and the next mode shift information area in the RWM is saved (step A1607). Thereafter, a probability information command corresponding to the effect mode number is prepared (step A1608), and it is determined whether the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609). If the prepared probability information command matches the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; Y), the process proceeds to step A1619.

If the prepared probability information command does not match the value of the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1609; N), the prepared probability information command is saved in the power failure recovery transmission command area (step A1610), An effect command setting process (step A1611) is performed.
Next, an effect rotation number command corresponding to the effect remaining rotation number is prepared (step A1612), and effect command setting processing (step A1613) is performed.
Next, a high probability change frequency command corresponding to the high probability change frequency is prepared (step A 1614), and effect command setting processing (step A 1615) is performed.
Next, it is determined whether the new effect mode is a mode to hit the left (step A1616), and if it is not a mode to hit the left (step A1616; N), the process proceeds to step A1619. If the mode is the left-handed mode (step A1616; Y), the left-handed instruction notification command is prepared (step A1617), and after the rendering command setting process (step A1618) is performed, the process of step A1619 Transition.

Then, a flag is loaded from the special figure game mode flag save area (step A1619), and it is determined whether the loaded flag is a flag related to the special figure time-short (time-short state) (step A1620).
If the loaded flag is a flag relating to special drawing time reduction (step A1620; Y), special drawing transition processing setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hit end processing is ended.
Also, if the loaded flag is not a flag relating to special drawing time (N in step A 1620; N), save a signal relating to a left hitting instruction (for example, the firing position designation signal 1 is OFF) in the test signal output data area (step A1621), in order to turn off the display LED (for example, the first gaming state display unit 57) in the right hitting, save the number in the left hitting state in the gaming state indication number 2 area (step A1622) Processing transition setting processing 3 (step A1623) is performed, and the small hitting end processing is ended.

[Special figure normal processing shift setting processing 3]
Next, the details of the special view ordinary process shift setting process 3 (step A1623) in the above-described small hitting end process will be described. As shown in FIG. 68, in the special processing routine processing transition setting processing, first, "0" related to the special processing routine processing is set as the processing number (step A1631), and the processing number is set as the special processing game processing number area. Save (step A1632).

Next, save the signal related to the small hit end (for example, the big hit 1 signal OFF) in the external information output data area (step A1633), and the signal related to the small hit end (eg special symbol 1 small hit signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step A1634).
Next, the information of the variation symbol determination flag area is cleared (step A1635), the information of the effect mode transition information area is cleared (step A1636), and the information of the special view game mode flag save area is cleared (step A1637).
Next, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the special winning opening fraud monitoring period flag area (step A1638), and the special processing routine processing transition setting processing 3 is ended.

[Processing command setting process]
Next, details of the effect command setting process in each process executed during the timer interrupt process will be described. As shown in FIG. 69, in the effect command setting process, first, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2001), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2002; Y), the process returns to the process of reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2001).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2002; N), the command data (MODE) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2003).

Next, the status of the effect serial transmission buffer is read (step A2004), and it is determined whether the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is full (step A2005; Y), the process returns to the process for reading the status of the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2004).
If the effect serial transmission buffer is not full (step A2005; N), the command data (ACTION) is written to the effect serial transmission buffer (step A2006), and the effect command setting process is ended.
The effect command setting process may be simply referred to as "command setting process".

[Symbol variation control processing]
FIG. 70 shows symbol variation control processing (steps A20 and A22) in the special drawing game processing described above, and symbol variation control processing (step B15) in the common drawing game processing described later. The symbol variation control process is a process of controlling the variation of the special symbol (the first special figure, the second special figure, etc.) or the ordinary symbol (the common figure) and setting the display data of the special symbol or the ordinary symbol.

  In this symbol variation control process, first, it is checked whether the variation control flag applied to the symbol to be controlled (for example, any of the first special figure, the second special figure, and the common figure) is changing (step A2101) . In the case of this embodiment, the lower address of the fluctuation control flag area, the initial value of the blinking control timer, the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value, the display table 2 (in the fluctuation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14 The address for stop) and the address for display table 1 (for variation) are defined.

If the fluctuation flag pertaining to the symbol to be controlled is fluctuating (step A2102; Y), the symbol display table (for variation) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2103). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for variation) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, the blinking control timer to be controlled is updated by -1 (step A2104), and it is determined whether the updated blinking control timer is "0" (step A2105), and the updated blinking control timer is "0". If not (step A2105; N), display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  Also, when the blinking control timer after updating is "0" (step A2105; Y), the blinking control timer initial value corresponding to the target blinking timer area is saved (step A2106), and the variation symbol number of the control object Is updated by +1 in the corresponding range (step A2107), and display data corresponding to the value of the variation symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2108). Then, the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

On the other hand, when the changing flag concerning the symbol to be controlled is not changing (step A2102; N), the symbol display table (for stopping) corresponding to the symbol to be controlled is acquired (step A2109). In the case of this embodiment, the address of the symbol display table (for stopping) is defined on the variation control table prepared in step A19, step A21 and step B14.
Next, display data corresponding to the value of the stop symbol number area to be controlled is acquired (step A2110), the acquired display data is saved in the target segment area (step A2111), and the symbol variation control process is ended.

  The blinking control timer initial value saved in step A2106 is a value defined in the variation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. Here, a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the second special figure (second special figure variation display game) A value corresponding to 104 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of), and a value corresponding to 52 ms is defined as the blinking control timer initial value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (generally drawn fluctuation display game) It is done. The blinking control timer initial value is an interval at which the lighting pattern is updated in the collective display device 50 during the fluctuation time.

  Further, the corresponding range in step A2107 is defined by the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value defined in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed. When the variation symbol number reaches the upper limit value by updating the variation symbol number by +1 in step A2107, the variation symbol number is set to 0, and the variation symbol number is 0 to 0 (variation symbol number upper limit judgment value -1 It is updated sequentially in the range of). In steps A2108 and A2111, display data (lighting pattern) corresponding to the fluctuation symbol number is acquired and displayed, and the lighting pattern is updated (changed) the number of times equal to the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value. Will be repeatedly displayed.

  Here, 8 is defined as the variation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the variation control table of the first special figure (first special figure variation display game), and the variation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-7. Therefore, the special figure 1 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variation display of the first special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting pattern of eight times. In addition, 2 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the second special figure (the second special figure fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol numbers can be updated alternately with 0 and 1. Therefore, the special figure 2 in-varying display which is repeatedly displayed during the variable indication of the second special figure variation display game makes a round with updating of the lighting patterns of two times. Further, 4 is defined as the fluctuation symbol number upper limit judgment value in the fluctuation control table of the common drawing (general drawing fluctuation display game), and the fluctuation symbol number can be updated in the range of 0-3. Therefore, the common drawing in-progress display, which is repeatedly displayed during the variable display of the common drawing change display game, makes one round of four lighting pattern updates.

  By defining the blinking control timer initial value and the fluctuation symbol number upper limit value in the fluctuation control table prepared according to the game to be processed as described above, the interval and the display for updating the lighting pattern in the collective display device 50 are round The number of updates to be made can be set for each game.

[Distribution process]
FIG. 71 shows the sorting process (steps A476, A479, A485) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting process. In the distribution process, the latter half variation selection table of the special view variation display game is selected from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1, or the second half variation selection table is selected based on the variation pattern random number 2. In the process for selecting the second half fluctuation pattern (second half fluctuation number) or selecting the first half fluctuation pattern (first half fluctuation number) of the special figure fluctuation display game from the first half fluctuation selection table based on the fluctuation pattern random number 3. is there.

  In this distribution process, first, the head data of the target selection table (the latter half variation group table prepared in step A472, the latter half variation selection table prepared in step A477, or the first half variation selection table prepared in step A483) Is checked if it is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2201). Here, the second half variation group table, the second half variation selection table, and the first half variation selection table are predetermined in association with at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation number) In the case of a selection table that stores the distribution value of, but does not require distribution, the distribution value "0", that is, a code without distribution is specified at the top.

Then, if the head data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is a code without distribution (step A2202; Y), the data corresponding to the distributed result The address is updated (step A2207), and the distribution process is ended.
On the other hand, when the first data of the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table, second half fluctuation selection table or first half fluctuation selection table) is not a code without distribution (step A2202; N), the target selection table (second half fluctuation group table) And one distribution value defined first in the latter half fluctuation selection table or the first half fluctuation selection table) (step A2203).

  Subsequently, the distributed value acquired in step A2203 is subtracted from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1, fluctuation pattern random number 2 or fluctuation pattern random number 3) prepared in step A473, A478 or A484, and a new random number value is calculated. Is calculated (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than "0" (step A2205; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2206), the process proceeds to step A2203 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.

That is, the distribution value defined next in the target selection table (the second half fluctuation group table, the second half fluctuation selection table, and the first half fluctuation selection table) is acquired (step A2203), and then it is determined in the previous step A2205 A new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value (step A2204), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205).
The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y). Thereby, at least one second half variation selection table, second half variation pattern (second half variation number) or first half variation pattern (first half variation pattern) defined in the target selection table (second half variation group table, second half variation selection table or first half variation selection table) Any one of the second half variation selection table, the second half variation pattern (second half variation number) and the first half variation pattern (first half variation number) is selected from the variation numbers).
Then, if it is determined in step A2205 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2205; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2207), and the distribution processing is ended. Do.

[2-byte distribution process]
FIG. 72 shows 2-byte distribution processing (step A475) in the above-mentioned fluctuation pattern setting processing. The 2-byte distribution process is a process for selecting the second half variation selection table of the special figure variation display game from the second half variation group table based on the variation pattern random number 1.

  In this 2-byte distribution process, first, it is checked whether the top data in the selection table (the second half variation group table prepared in step A 472) is a code without distribution (ie, "0") (step A2301). Here, although the second half fluctuation group table stores a predetermined distribution value in association with at least one second half fluctuation selection table, the second half specifies only the second half fluctuation selection table in which the second half fluctuation pattern is “no reach”. In the fluctuation group table (for example, a part of fluctuation group table when the result is out), since there is no need to distribute, a distribution value “0”, that is, a code without distribution is specified at the head .

Then, if the first data in the selection table (second-half variation group table) is a code without distribution (step A2302; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the result of distribution is updated (step A2307). End the distribution process.
On the other hand, if the first data in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is not a code without distribution (step A2302; N), one distribution value first defined in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (Step A2303).

Subsequently, a new random number value is calculated by subtracting the distribution value acquired in step A2303 from the random number value (value of fluctuation pattern random number 1) prepared in step A473 (step A2304), and the calculated new randomness It is determined whether the numerical value is smaller than "0" (step A2305). Then, if the new random number value is not smaller than “0” (step A2305; N), after updating to the address of the next distribution value (step A2306), the process proceeds to step A2303 and the subsequent steps Do the processing.
That is, the distribution value defined next in the selection table (second-half fluctuation group table) is acquired (step A2303), and then the distribution value is newly subtracted by subtracting the distribution value from the random number value determined in the previous step A2305. A random number value is calculated (step A2304), and it is determined whether the calculated new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305).

The above process is executed until it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number value is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y). Thereby, any one second half fluctuation selection table is selected from at least one second half fluctuation selection table defined in the selection table (second half fluctuation group table).
When it is determined in step A2305 that the new random number is smaller than "0" (step A2305; Y), the address of the data corresponding to the distributed result is updated (step A2307), and 2-byte distribution processing is performed. Finish.
The configuration of the distribution process shown in FIG. 71 and the configuration of the 2-byte distribution process shown in FIG. 72 are basically the same, but whether the size of the random number used for distribution is 1 byte or 2 bytes? Because they differ in that, the program instructions to calculate are different.

[Puppet game processing]
Next, details of the common-play game process (step S110) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the common drawing game processing, monitoring of the input of the gate switch 34a, control of the entire processing concerning the common drawing variation display game, setting of display of common drawing, and the like are performed.

  As shown in FIG. 73, in the common-play game processing, first, a gate switch monitoring process (step B1) for monitoring an input from the gate switch 34a is performed, and a general prize winning switch for monitoring an input from the starting opening 2 switch 37a. A monitoring process (step B2) is performed. Next, if the common-play game processing timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step B3). In addition, the minimum value of the common drawing game processing timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the common drawing game processing timer has become "0" (step B4).

  If it is determined that the value of the common-play game processing timer is "0" (step B4; Y), that is, it is determined that the time-up or time-up has already occurred, reference is made to branch to the processing corresponding to the common-play game processing number The routine drawing game sequence branch table is set in the register (step B5), and the table is used to obtain the branch destination address of the process corresponding to the regular drawing game process number (step B6). Then, a subroutine call is made according to the common drawing game process number (step B7).

In step B7, when the popular drawing game processing number is "0", the start of fluctuation of the common drawing fluctuation display game is monitored, and the setting of fluctuation start of the common drawing fluctuation display game, the setting of the effect, the common drawing fluctuation The ordinary drawing process (step B8) is performed to set information necessary for performing the process.
If the drawing game processing number is “1” in step B7, a drawing change processing (step B9) is performed to set information necessary for performing the drawing display processing.

In addition, if the result of the common drawing variation display game is a hit when the common drawing game processing number is "2" in step B7, the setting of the common charge open time according to whether or not the time saving state is being performed. In addition, the general drawing display processing (step B10) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common processing per processing.
In addition, if the common drawing game processing number is "3" in step B7, then the common drawing is continued during the common drawing, or the common drawing is performed to set the information necessary for performing the common electric residual ball processing, etc. A process (step B11) is performed.

In step B7, if the common drawing game process number is "4", general electric remaining ball processing (step B12) is performed to set information required for performing the common drawing end processing.
If the drawing game processing number is "5" in step B7, the drawing drawing end processing (step B13) is performed to set the information necessary for performing the drawing common processing.

Then, after preparing the common drawing fluctuation control table for controlling the fluctuation of the normal symbol by the common drawing display (step B14), the symbol fluctuation control process related to the control of the fluctuation of the common symbol by the common drawing display (step B15) ), And end the common drawing game processing.
On the other hand, when it is determined in step B4 that the value of the common-play game processing timer is not "0" (step B4; N), that is, it is determined that the time is not up, the process proceeds to step B14 and the subsequent processes are performed. Do.

[Gate switch monitoring process]
Next, details of the gate switch monitoring process (step B1) in the above-described common game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 74, in the gate switch monitoring process, first, it is determined whether or not there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101). Then, if there is an input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; Y), it is determined whether the game state (for example, during the big hit, during the small hit, during the special view time, during the common charge support) (Step B102).
When it is a game state to hit the right (step B102; Y), it is determined whether the common drawing reservation number is obtained and the general drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105). If the game state is not right-handed (step B102; N), a left-handed command is prepared (step B103), and the rendering command setting process (step B104) is performed, and then the common drawing reserve number is acquired. It is determined whether the number of general drawing reservations is less than the upper limit (for example, "4") (step B105).

  If the common drawing reservation number is less than the upper limit (step B105; Y), the common drawing reservation number is updated by 1 (step B106), and the address of the random number storage area corresponding to the updated common drawing reservation number is calculated. (Step B107). Then, the random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit random number storage area (step B108), and the hit symbol random number is extracted and saved in the RWM hit symbol random number storage area (step B109). Finish.

  If it is determined in step B101 that there is no input to the gate switch 34a (step B101; N), or if it is determined in step B105 that the number of general drawing reservations is not less than the upper limit (step B105; N), End the gate switch monitoring process. That is, the game control apparatus 100 (RAM 111C) extracts a predetermined random number based on the detection of the gaming ball at the common drawing start gate 34, and stores the predetermined number as the starting memory which becomes the right to execute the common drawing variation display game. Make a starting memory means.

[Puden prize winning switch monitoring process]
Next, the details of the common prize winning switch monitoring process (step B2) in the above-described common drawing game process will be described. As shown in FIG. 75, in the general competition winning switch monitoring process, first, whether it is in the common drawing, that is, the common drawing fluctuation display game is hit and the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is executing the opening operation a predetermined number of times It is determined whether there is any (step B201). Then, if the drawing is in the middle (step B201; Y), it is determined whether there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202) and there is an input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; Y) If it is determined, the count number of the common charge counter is updated by 1 (step B203).

  Next, it is determined whether or not the count number of the updated common charge counter is the upper limit value (for example, "6") or more (step B204), and it is determined that the count number is the upper limit value or more (step B204; Y) Then, hit the control pointer area in the common drawing and save the operation end value (for example, "4") (step B205), clear the common drawing game processing timer to 0 (step B206), and execute the general electric winning switch monitoring process finish. That is, when there is a routine power prize higher than the upper limit value in the hit state of the common drawing, the hit state of the common drawing is ended halfway at that point.

  If it is determined in step B201 that a per figure drawing is not in progress (step B201; N), if it is determined in step B202 that there is no input to the start opening 2 switch 37a (step B202; N), or in step B204. When it is determined that the common charge count number is not the upper limit value or more (step B204; N), the common match winning switch monitoring process is ended.

[Normal figure normal processing]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing (step B8) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 76, in the ordinary drawing routine processing, first, it is judged whether the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B301), and the ordinary drawing reservation number is “0” (step B201; Y ) Performs ordinary drawing transition processing transition setting processing 1 (step B321), and ends ordinary circulation processing. Also, if the common drawing reservation number is not "0" (step B301; N), load random numbers from the RWM hit random number storage area (for the hold number 1) and the hit symbol random number storage area (for the hold number 1) ( Step B302), clear random number storage area (for holding number 1), touch symbol random number storage area (for holding number 1) is cleared to 0 (step B303), and the probability of hit results in a common drawing variation display game is normal It is determined whether it is in the common map high probability raised higher than the probability (that is, the common map low probability), ie, in the short time state (step B304).

If the drawing probability is not in the high probability (step B304; N), the lower limit judgment value (low probability lower judgment value) in the low probability of the drawing is set (step B305). ; Y) sets the lower limit judgment value (high probability lower limit judgment value) at the time of the general drawing high probability (step B306).
Thereafter, it is determined whether or not the value of the random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307). If the value of the random number is not greater than or equal to the upper judgment value (step B307; N), the value of the random number is determined to be B305 or B306. It is determined whether it is less than the lower limit judgment value set (step B308).

If the value of the per-random number is greater than or equal to the upper limit judgment value (step B307; Y) or if the value of the per-random number is less than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; Y), the per-flag In the area, save the deviation information (step B309), set the out-of-stop symbol number (step B310), save the out-of-pattern information in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B311), stop the common symbol number stop Save to the symbol area (step B315).
On the other hand, if the value of the random number per hit is not smaller than the lower limit judgment value set in step B305 or B306 (step B308; N), the hit information is saved in the hit flag area (step B312) and the load loaded in step B302 The hit stop symbol number corresponding to the symbol random number is set (step B313), and the stop symbol information corresponding to the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol information area (step B314), and the stop symbol number is common drawing stop symbol Save to the area (step B315).

In the case of the present embodiment, the probability of hitting at low probability is 0/251, the probability of hitting at high probability is 250/251, the upper judgment value is “251”, and the low probability judgment value is “251”, the high probability lower limit judgment value is “1”.
Therefore, at the time of the general drawing low probability, the value of the hit random number deviates in all cases of “0” to “250”.
Further, at the time of the drawing normal probability, the case where the value of the hit random number is any of “1” to “250” is present, and the case where the value of the hit random number is “0” is not.

After the stop symbol number is saved in the common drawing stop symbol area (step 315), the stop symbol number is saved in the test signal output data area (step B316).
Thereafter, the hit random number storage area is shifted (step B317), the free area after the shift is cleared to 0 (step B318), and the common drawing reserve number is updated by -1 (step B319). That is, with the common drawing variation display game regarding the oldest common drawing reservation number 1 being executed, the processing of raising the positions of the common drawing reservation numbers 2 to 4 held by the common drawing reservation number 1 or later one by one I do. As a result of this processing, the values for the number of general drawing reservations 2 to from the number of general drawing reservations 4 for the random number storage area per common drawing move from the number 1 for general drawing reservations for the random number storage area to the number 3 for general drawing reservation It will be done. Then, the value for the common drawing reservation number 4 of the random number storage area per common drawing is cleared, and the common drawing reservation number is decremented by one.
Then, the general drawing variation processing transition setting process (step B320) is performed, and the general drawing routine processing is ended. That is, the game execution means for the game control device 100 to execute the common view change display game as the variable display game (based on the common view start storage) based on the detection of the gaming ball in the common view start gate 34 (inflow area). I

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 1]
FIG. 77 shows the ordinary drawing transition process transition setting process 1 (step B 321) in the ordinary drawing routine process described above and the ordinary drawing transition process transition setting process 1 (step B 508) in the ordinary drawing display process described later. . In this common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1, first, "0" is set as a processing number for moving to common drawing normal processing (step B331), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area (step B332). After that, the flag during the fraud monitoring period is saved in the routine power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B333), and the routine diagram transition processing setting processing 1 ends.

[Processing setting setting process during general drawing fluctuation]
FIG. 78 shows the processing shift setting processing (step B320) during the common drawing fluctuation processing in the common drawing normal processing described above. In this common drawing fluctuating process transition setting process, first, “1” is set as a processing number for shifting to the common drawing fluctuating process (step B 341), and the processing number is saved in the common drawing game processing number area ( Step B342).
After that, the common drawing fluctuation time (for example, 500 ms. In the case of this embodiment, the common drawing fluctuation time is common between the common drawing low probability state and the common drawing high probability state) Save (step B343), save the signal related to the start of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal ON) in the test signal output data area (step B344), and change the common drawing fluctuation display game A floating flag indicating medium is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area (step B345).
Then, save the blinking control timer initial value (here, 52 ms), which is the initial value of the timer of the blinking cycle of the common drawing indicator, in the common drawing blinking control timer area (step B346) Finish.

[During processing of common map fluctuation]
Next, the details of the general drawing fluctuation processing (step B9) in the above-described common drawing game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (a), in the general-diagram variation processing, a general-diagram-display processing transition setting process (step B401) is performed.

[Processing transition setting processing during common map display]
Next, the details of the processing for setting transition to general processing during general display during the processing for general fluctuation during the above-mentioned processing (step B401) will be described. As shown in FIG. 79 (b), in the processing for setting transition to general processing, first, the processing number is set to "2" as setting processing for transitioning to processing during general display (step B411), The number is saved in the common drawing game process number area (step B412). Thereafter, the common drawing display time (for example, 600 ms) which is the display time of the common drawing fluctuation display game result in the common drawing indicator is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B413). (For example, the normal symbol 1 fluctuation signal is OFF) is saved in the test signal output data area (step B414), and the stop flag indicating that the common drawing fluctuation display game is stopped is saved in the common drawing fluctuation control flag area Then (step B415), the processing transition setting processing during the display of the general drawing is ended.

[Process while displaying a common map]
Next, details of the common drawing display processing (step B10) in the common drawing game processing described above will be described. As shown in FIG. 80, in the processing for displaying the common drawing, first, the hit flag (hit information or out information) set in the common processing is loaded (step B501), and the hit flag area of RWM is cleared. Then (step B502), it is determined whether the loaded hit flag is hit information (step B503).

If the hit flag is not hit information (step B503; N), the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 1 (step B508) for moving to the common drawing normal processing is performed, and the common drawing display processing is ended.
On the other hand, if the hit flag is hit information (step B 503; Y), the hit processing setting table is set (step B 504), and the hit start pointer value (eg, “0 ",""2" or "4") is obtained and saved in the control pointer area during the drawing (step B505). Next, a general power release time (for example, 500 msec or 1700 ms) corresponding to the common drawing stop symbol information is acquired and saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B506). Thereafter, the processing transition setting processing (step B211) is performed per common drawing, and the common drawing display processing is ended.

[Per process of processing transition setting processing per common map]
FIG. 81 shows the processing transition setting processing (step B507) per common drawing in the above-described processing of displaying the common drawing. In this processing per process setting processing, first, "3" is set as a processing number for processing transition to processing per common drawing (step B511), and the processing number is saved in the general processing game processing number area. (Step B512). After that, test signal output data for the signal related to the hit of the common drawing fluctuation display game (for example, the signal during normal symbol 1 is ON) and the signal for the start of power operation (for example, the signal for ordinary electric character 1 operation is ON) In order to save in the area (step B513) and output a signal for driving (turning on) the common voltage solenoid, the on data is saved in the common voltage solenoid output data area (step B514).

  Further, the information of the common charge count number area storing the number of winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is cleared (step B515), and the general electric number storing the winnings to the normal fluctuation winning device 37 in the regular monitoring period The information on the incorrect winning number area is cleared (step B516). Then, a flag (outside of fraud monitoring period flag) defining out of fraud monitoring period of normal fluctuation winning a prize device 37 is saved in the general electric power fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 517), and the processing transition setting processing is completed per common drawing. Do.

[Every time per popular map]
Next, the details of the common drawing in the common drawing game process (step B11) will be described. As shown in FIG. 82, in the middle processing per normal drawing, first, the middle control pointer is loaded and prepared (step B601), and the value of the control pointer per common drawing loaded is equal to or more than the upper limit It is determined (step B602).

Then, if the value of the control pointer in the common drawing is not equal to or more than the upper limit (step B602; N), the control pointer in the common drawing is updated by +1 (step B603), and Go and finish the process during the popular map.
If the value of the control pointer during the common drawing is greater than or equal to the upper limit (step B602; Y), then the general processing shift is performed without performing processing of updating the processing control pointer area during the common drawing by +1 in step B603. The setting process (step B604) is performed, and the process is ended during the common drawing.

[Puppet operation transition setting process]
FIG. 83 shows the general-purpose power transition setting process (step B604) in the above-mentioned per-normal-period process. The routine operation shift setting process is a process for controlling the drive of the routine power solenoid 37c for opening and closing the normal fluctuation winning device 37, and branches the process according to the value of the control pointer (general control pointer). It is like that. In this routine operation transition setting process, first, a branch process is performed according to the value of the control pointer (step B611).

  If the value of the control pointer is “0” or “2”, the process proceeds to step B 612 to control the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37, so after the closing of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 corresponding to the control pointer Saves the off time in the common power solenoid output data area (step B613), and sets the common power operation shift to save the wait time of the general game processing timer area (step B612) and turn off the common power solenoid 37c. End the process.

  If the value of the control pointer is “1” or “3”, the process proceeds to step B 614 to control the opening of the normal fluctuation winning device 37, so that the normal fluctuation winning device 37 corresponding to the control pointer In order to save the general power release time, which is the open time, in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B614) and turn on the general power solenoid 37c, save the on data in the general power solenoid output data area (step B615) Ends the routine operation transition setting process.

  If the value of the control pointer is "4", the process proceeds to step B616 to end the release control of the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 and perform the general electric power remaining ball processing, so "4" as the processing number Are set (step B 616). Then, the processing number is saved in the general drawing game processing number area (step B617), and the general electric power remaining ball processing time is saved in the general drawing game processing timer area (step B619). Thereafter, in order to turn off the common solenoid 37c, the off data is saved in the common solenoid output data area (step B619), and the common power operation transition setting process is ended.

Here, in the present embodiment, for example, a weight time of 200 ms is saved in step B612, 1700 ms is saved in step B614 as the common charge release time, and 600 ms is saved in step B618 as the common charge residual ball processing time. .
Furthermore, when the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 1”, “4” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, "500 ms" is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the general power is "500 ms", the normal power (normal fluctuation winning device 37) opens for 500 ms, and then the control pointer is "4" Therefore, the general charge residual ball processing time of 600 ms is set.
Also, if the stop figure symbol is "per hit symbol 2", "2" is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the during stop processing shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the release time of the common charge is "1700 ms", the common charge is released for 1700 ms, and then the weight of 200 ms is kept since the control pointer is "2" Since the time is set and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the normal drawing, the power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the normal drawing, 600 ms of The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.
Further, if the stop figure symbol is “per hit symbol 3”, “0” is acquired as the value of the hit start pointer in step B505 of the processing during the limit map display shown in FIG. In step B506, “1700 milliseconds” is acquired as the general power release time. Therefore, after the lapse of the display time of 600 ms, since the PV release time is "1700 ms", the PV is released for 1700 ms, and thereafter, since the control pointer is "0", the weight of 200 ms is waited. The time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "1" during the normal drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then 200 ms since the control pointer during the expansion is updated to "2". The wait time is set, and then the control pointer is updated to "3" during the general drawing, and the general power is released for 1700 ms, and then the control pointer is updated to "4" during the general drawing, 600 ms. The normal charge residual ball processing time is set.

[Puden residual ball treatment]
Next, the details of the routine charge remaining ball processing (step B12) in the above-described regular game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (a), in the generalization residual ball processing, the end processing shift setting processing (step B701) is performed per common drawing.

[Process for setting end processing transition per common drawing]
Next, the details of the processing for shifting to the end processing shift setting processing (step B701) in the above-described normal charge residual ball processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 84 (b), in the processing for setting end processing per common drawing, first, the processing number "5" related to the end processing per common drawing is set (step B711), and the processing number The file is saved in the processing number area (step B712).

  Thereafter, the common drawing ending time (for example, 100 ms) is saved in the common drawing game processing timer area (step B 713), and a signal related to the operation termination of the normal fluctuation winning device 37 (for example, the normal electric character 1 operation signal OFF) Are saved in the test signal output data area (step B714), and the common charge count number area for counting the number of prizes for the normal fluctuation winning apparatus 37 is cleared (step B715). Then, the control pointer area in the common drawing is cleared (step B716), and the processing for setting the end processing per common drawing is ended.

[End processing per popular map]
Next, the details of the end-of-round-figure end process (step B13) in the above-mentioned ordinary-figure game processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (a), in the end processing per common drawing, common processing normal processing shift setting processing 2 (step B801) is performed.

[General drawing normal processing transition setting processing 2]
Next, the details of the common drawing routine processing transition setting processing 2 (step B801) in the above-described common drawing end processing will be described. As shown in FIG. 85 (b), in the ordinary drawing normal process transition setting process 2, first, the process number “0” related to the ordinary drawing normal process is set (step B811), and the process number is set to the ordinary drawing game process Save in the number area (step B812).

  After that, save the signal (for example, the signal is turned off during the normal symbol 1) to the test signal output data area (step B 813) and define the fraud monitoring period of the normal fluctuation winning device 37. The flag (during fraud monitoring period flag) is saved in the routine power transmission fraud monitoring period flag area (step B 814), and the routine drawing transition processing setting process 2 is ended.

  In addition, the command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 as in the special view variable display game also for the common view change display game, and the effect control device 300 displays the decoration common view change display game forming the decoration game according to the command. You may For example, a command for forming start information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 at the start of the common drawing change display game, and the effect control device 300 starts the decoration common drawing change display game forming the decoration game based on the reception of the start information. It is good. In addition, a command forming stop information is sent to the effect control device 300 at the time of deriving the result of the common view change display game, and the effect control device 300 stops the result in the decoration common view change display game forming the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information. It may be displayed. In addition, when the game state in which the result of the common drawing fluctuation display game becomes a hit and opens the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is started, a command corresponding to the special gaming state start information is transmitted to the effect control device 300, and the effect control device At 300, based on the reception of this command, an effect relating to a gaming state in which the normal fluctuation winning device 37 is opened may be started.

[Segment LED editing process]
Next, details of the segment LED editing process (step S111) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the segment LED editing process, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, the general drawing reserve display 56, the first gaming state display unit 57, and the second gaming state display provided in the collective display device 50. The section 58 performs settings relating to driving of the segment LEDs constituting the round display section 60.

  As shown in FIG. 86, in the segment LED editing process, first, the blink display timer is updated by +1 (step S501), and whether or not the output of a specific bit in the blink display timer area is on (whether it is 1). Is determined (step S502). The blinking display timer of the present embodiment is configured by performing a +1 update in timer interrupt processing performed every 4 ms using an 8-bit blinking display timer area. In this segment LED editing process, it is determined whether the output of the bit 5 in the blinking display timer area is on timing (is 1). Since the value of bit 5 is switched between 0 and 1 every 128 ms, it is possible to control turn-off and turn-on in units of 128 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control turning off and on in units of shorter or longer time with reference to other bits.

If the output is on timing (step S502; Y), the common drawing reservation number display table 1 is set among the common drawing reservation number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the common drawing reservation display is defined. (Step S503) When it is not the output on timing (Step S502; N), the common drawing reserve number display table 2 is set (Step S504).
Then, display data corresponding to the common drawing reservation number is acquired from the set common drawing reservation number display table and saved in the segment area of the common drawing reservation display unit (step S505). In the present embodiment, if the common drawing reserve number is any one of “0” to “2”, the display data becomes the same regardless of which common drawing reserve number display table is set.

Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S506), and in the case of the output on timing (step S506; Y), the special figure 1 reserve number in which the display mode on the special figure 1 reserve indicator is defined. Of the display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 1 hold count display table 1 is set (step S507), and when it is not the output on timing (step S506; N), the special figure 1 hold count display table 2 is set (step S506) Step S508).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 holding number display table, and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 1 holding display (step S 509).

Thereafter, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step S510), and in the case of the output on timing (step S510; Y), the special figure 2 reserve number display in which the display mode on the special view 2 reserve indicator is defined. Of the tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 pending number display table 1 is set (step S511), and when it is not the output on timing (step S510; N), the special figure 2 pending number display table 2 is set (step S510) S512).
Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 2 holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 2 holding number display table and saved in the segment area of the special drawing 2 holding display (step S513).
Furthermore, a round display table in which the display mode in the round display unit is defined is set (step S514), display data corresponding to the round display LED pointer is acquired, and saved in the segment area of the round display unit (step S515). ).

Next, the game state display table 1 is set in which the display mode in the second game state display unit 58 that lights up when the time saving state occurs and notifies the occurrence of the time saving state (step S516) The display data corresponding to is acquired and saved in the segment area of the second gaming state display unit 58 (step S517). In the present embodiment, the second gaming state display unit 58 consisting of one LED is configured to be turned off during normal operation and to be turned on during the special view time (during common power support).
Thereafter, the gaming state display table 2 is set in which the display mode in the first gaming state display section 57 is informed that the gaming state is more advantageous to the right hitting than the left hitting (step S518). The display data corresponding to the game state display number 2 is acquired and saved in the segment area of the first game state display unit 57 (step S519), and the segment LED editing process is ended. In the present embodiment, the first gaming state display unit 57 consisting of one LED is turned off at the time of normal hitting (left hitting) and right hitting (in the case of the present embodiment, big hit, small hit, medium power support) Medium) is configured to light up.
That is, the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, and the common view reserve display 56 constitute start storage display means for displaying the information of the start storage stored in the start storage means. Further, the game control device 100 serves as start storage display control means for controlling display on the start storage display means.

  FIG. 87 (a) shows the display modes of the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, and the common view reserve display 56. Each display unit is configured to display the number of reservations by two light emitting units. In the case of the number of reservations 0, any one is turned off, in the case of number 1 the one is turned off and the other one is lit. In the case of the number of holdings 3, one is lit and the other blinks, and in the case of the number of holdings 4, both are blinked.

  Such a display mode is selected by alternately selecting the table every 128 ms by selecting the number-of-holds display tables 1 and 2 according to the value of bit 5 of the blinking display timer area as described above. This is realized by setting the corresponding display mode in the table with reference to the current number of reservations. FIG. 87 (b) shows the contents of the number-of-holds display tables 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. 87 (a), the display mode corresponding to the number of reservations is the same in each display, and the contents of the number-of-holdings display table are also the same. Here, the light emitting unit 1 corresponds to D9, D11, and D31, and the light emitting unit 2 corresponds to D10, D12, and D32.

  For example, in the case of the number of holdings 1, the light-emitting unit 1 is turned off by selecting both of the holding display tables 1 and 2 and turned off, and the light-emitting unit 2 is selected by lighting both holding displays 1 and 2 It becomes a lighting state by doing. Further, in the case of the number of holdings 3, the lighting of the light emitting unit 1 is selected by lighting both in the holding display tables 1 and 2 and the lighting state is achieved. For the light emitting unit 2, lighting is selected in the hold display table 1, and in the holding display table 2, turning off is selected, so that the light emitting unit 2 is in a blinking state in which lighting and turning off are repeated every 128 ms.

  That is, if the value of the blinking display timer is in a predetermined off range (here, the range of bit 5 is 0) in the case of blinking, it is off and is outside the range of off (here, the range of bit 5 is 1) Make it light if there is. Further, the turn-off range in the case where the display mode of at least the special view 1 reserve display 54 and the special view 2 reserve display 55 is in the blinking state is a common range, and here the blink mode in the display mode of the common view reserve display 56 The turn-off range in the case of the state is also a common range.

  Furthermore, the blinking display timer is constantly updated, and the blinking display timer is not reset or another value is not set even if the number of holding changes. Therefore, when shifting to the blinking state, the light emitting state is either on or off according to the value of the blinking display timer in the segment LED editing process for the first time after the number of holding changes. For example, the light emitting unit 1 changes from the lighting state to the blinking state for the light emitting unit 1 when the number of holding changes to 3 and the value of the blinking display timer when changing changes the value for selecting the holding display table 1 (bit 5 is If it is 1), the lighting is continued, and if it is the value for selecting the hold display table 2 (bit 5 is 0), it is turned off immediately.

  By controlling the light emission mode as described above, the blinking timing is synchronized between the light emitting unit 1 and the light emitting unit 2, and the visibility of the display and the decorativeness are enhanced. Furthermore, the timings of blinking in the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, and the general view reserve display 56 are also synchronized, and the visibility and decoration of the display are further enhanced. In addition, the blinking control of the plurality of light emitting units can be performed by one blinking display timer, and the burden of control can be reduced. That is, the batch display device 50 is an information display device that displays information about a game by a light emitter, and the game control device 100 lights up with an information display device control unit that controls the information display device and a light off period in a blinking state. Make a blinking display timer for controlling the period.

  In addition, when the number of reservations changes and shifts from blinking to lighting, the value of the blinking display timer is the value that selects the suspension display table 1 in the first segment LED editing process after the number of reservations changes (bit If 5 is 1), lighting is continued, and if it is a value for selecting the hold display table 2 (bit 5 is 0), it is immediately changed from lighting to lighting. That is, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emitting state is different from the transitioned light emitting state, the light emitting state is immediately changed. In this case, there is no case of transition from the blinking state to the extinguished state, but if there is such a transition, extinguishing is maintained if the current light emitting state is extinguished as described above, and the current light emitting state is If it is on, it will be changed to off immediately.

  From the above, on the gaming machine which executes the game in which the identification information is variably displayed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result, the game machine generates a state advantageous to the player The information display device (collective display device 50) for displaying information related to the game by the body and the information display device control means (game control device 100) for controlling the information display device, the information display device control means Information on the game is displayed by controlling the light emitter in any one or both of the lighting state and the lighting state and the lighting state, and a period in which the lighting is turned off and a period in which the lighting is on and Is provided with a blinking display timer (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game, and when the blinking state is set, the value of the blinking display timer is extinguished if it is within the predetermined extinguishing range, and the predetermined extinguishing range It is configured to be controlled to light up if it is outside, constantly updates the blinking display timer regardless of whether it is blinking or not, and when the blinking state is started, It will be started from the light emission state according to the value. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, the start memory which becomes the right to execute the game based on the detection of the game ball in the flow area where the flow of game balls can be detected (the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the common drawing start gate 34) And a game execution unit (game control apparatus 100) for executing a game based on the start storage stored in the start storage unit, The area includes a first inflow area and a second inflow area, and the start storage means stores the first start memory as the start storage based on the detection of the gaming ball in the first inflow area, and the second inflow The second starting memory is stored as the starting memory based on the detection of the gaming ball in the area, and the game execution means executes the first game based on the first starting memory, and the second starting memory is based on the second starting memory. Configured to run the game The information display device control means (game control device 100) displays the number of first start memories on the first display section of the information display device (collective display device 50), and the number of second start memories is information It is displayed on the second display unit of the display device, and the blinking state is controlled using the common blink display timer in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, since a common blink display timer can be used by a plurality of display units, the burden of control can be reduced. In addition, the blinking state can be synchronized with a plurality of display portions, and the decorativeness and the visibility can be improved.

  Here, in the present embodiment, the first inflow area and the second inflow area are two selected from among the start winning hole 36, the normal change winning device 37, and the common drawing start gate 34. The first start memory and the second start memory are start memories corresponding to the selected two inflow areas, and two of the first start memory, the second start memory, and the common start memory. It is. Further, the first game and the second game are games corresponding to the selected two inflow areas, and are a first special view variation display game, a second special view variation display game, and a common view variation display game. Two of them. Further, the first display unit and the second display unit are display units corresponding to the selected two inflow areas, and the special view 1 suspension display 54, the special view 2 suspension display 55, and the general view suspension display Two out of fifty-six.

  In addition, the information display device control means (game control device 100) is configured to set the predetermined turn-off range as the common range in the first display unit and the second display unit. Therefore, the blinking state can be synchronized by the plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and the visibility can be improved.

  Further, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emitting state is different from the light emitting state to be transitioned, the light emitting state is immediately changed. Therefore, it is possible to immediately notify the player of the change in state.

  In the special figure 1 reserve display 54, the special figure 2 reserve indicator 55, and the common view reserve indicator 56, it is assumed that the blink state is displayed using a common blink display timer, but other than this in the collective display device 50 The special display 1 (special display 1 display 51, special display 2 display 52, general drawing display 53, first gaming state display unit 57, second gaming state display unit 58, round display unit 60, etc.) also blinks In this case, the blinking state may be controlled using a common blinking display timer, and the blinking states may be synchronized with each other.

  Also, by setting the contents of the hold display table of the special view 1 hold display 54, the special view 2 hold display 55, and the common view hold display 56, various lighting modes of the respective hold displays can be configured. And the hold display can be related to each other. For example, in the special view 1 suspension display 54 and the special view 2 suspension display 55, the on / off periods of the blinking state may be reversed. Since the blinking display timer is common, when both display units are in the blinking state, they are alternately turned on to improve visibility and decoration.

  In addition, when the light emission state transitions to the blink state or shifts from the blink state, if the light emission state in the blink state based on the value of the blink display timer does not change before and after the transition, the light emission state is temporarily changed to different You may For example, when it is the timing when the light emission state based on the value of the blink display timer in the blink state becomes the light state when transitioning from the light state to the blink state, the light is temporarily turned off along with the transition. . In addition, when the light emission state based on the value of the blink display timer in the blinking state is the lighted state when transitioning from the blinking state to the lighting state, the light is temporarily turned off along with the transition. . The time to be temporarily changed can be arbitrarily set, and if it is shorter than 128 ms which is the switching time of the blinking state, short blinking occurs when shifting to the blinking state, and the visibility is enhanced.

  Also, although the flashing cycle is 128 ms, it is not limited to this. In particular, by shortening the blinking cycle, it is possible to shorten the time until the transition can be recognized when transitioning to the blinking state or transitioning from the blinking state. Further, in the predetermined period in which the light emission state has shifted to the blinking state, the blinking period may be set shorter than the other periods.

  Further, in the above control, data to be set in the segment area is set by switching the hold display table to be referred to, but the information of the number of starting memories and the information of the blinking display timer are not referred to Data may be set directly to the segment area on the basis of this.

[Magnet fraud monitoring process]
Next, details of the magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the magnet fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the magnetic sensor 61, and the start and the end of fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 88, in the magnet fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the magnetic sensor 61 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3), the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on, that is, abnormal. It is determined whether or not magnetism is detected (step S601). If the magnetic sensor 61 is on (step S601; Y), that is, if an abnormal magnetism is detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer for measuring the abnormal magnetism detection period is updated by +1 (step S602). It is determined whether the time is up (step S603). In the case of the present embodiment, when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is 32 ms or more, it is determined that time is up.

  If the magnet fraud monitoring timer times out (step S603; Y), that is, if abnormal magnetism is continuously detected for a certain period, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S604), and the magnet fraud notification timer initial value ( For example, 60 seconds is saved in the magnet fraud alert timer area (step S605). Then, a command for magnet informing notification is prepared (step S606), a magnet fraud flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S607), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region. (Step S613). That is, when the magnetic sensor 61 is continuously turned on for a predetermined period (for example, eight interrupts), it is determined that an abnormality occurs.

  On the other hand, when the magnetic sensor 61 is not on (step S601; N), that is, when the abnormal magnetism is not detected, the magnet fraud monitoring timer is cleared (step S608), and the magnet fraud specifying the notification time of the magnet fraud If the notification timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S609). In addition, the minimum value of the magnet fraud alerting | reporting timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is "0" (step S610). In addition, also when the magnet fraud monitoring timer is not time-up (step S603; N), it transfers to the process of step S609.

  Then, if the value of the magnet fraud alerting timer is not "0" (step S610; N), that is, if the time is not up, the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. Also, if the value of the magnet fraud alert timer is "0" (step S610; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time is up, and the fraud alert period ends, or from the beginning it is fraudulent If the notification has not been made, a command for magnet notification end is prepared (step S611). Furthermore, a magnet fraud release flag is prepared as a magnet fraud flag (step S612), and it is determined whether the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613).

Then, if the prepared magnet fraud flag matches the value of the magnet fraud flag region (step S613; Y), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended. If the prepared magnet fraud flag does not match the value of the magnet fraud flag area (step S613; N), the prepared magnet fraud flag is saved in the magnet fraud flag area (step S614), and rendering command setting processing is performed. Then (step S615), the magnet fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S601; N” → “step S608” → “step S609” → “step S610; Y” → “step S611” → “step S612” → “step S613; Y” are normal routes.

[Board radio wave fraud monitoring processing]
Next, the details of the board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) in the above-described timer interrupt process will be described. In the radio wave fraud monitoring process, the presence or absence of abnormality is determined based on the detection signal from the board radio wave sensor 62, and the start and the end of the fraud notification are set.

  As shown in FIG. 89, in the radio wave fraud monitoring process, first, from the state of the detection signal output from the board radio wave sensor 62 and taken into the third input port 124 (input port 3) via the proximity I / F 121, It is determined whether the board radio wave sensor 62 is on, that is, an abnormal radio wave is detected (step S701). If the radio wave sensor is on (step S701; Y), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is detected, the initial value (for example, 60 seconds) of the radio wave fraud alert timer is saved in the radio wave fraud alert timer area (step S702).

  Then, prepare a command of board radio wave fraud notification (step S703), prepare a board radio wave fraud occurrence flag as a board radio wave fraud flag (step S704), and prepare the prepared board radio wave fraud flag with the value of the board radio wave fraud flag region. It is determined whether they match (step S709). That is, in the case of magnetic fraud, it is determined that an abnormality has occurred when the magnetic sensor 61 is turned on a predetermined number of times, while in the case of board radio wave fraud, the board radio sensor 62 is detected once. It is determined that an abnormality has occurred at the time of

  On the other hand, if the board radio wave sensor 62 is not on (step S 701; N), that is, if an abnormal radio wave is not detected, the radio wave fraud notification timer defining the notification time of radio wave fraud is not “0” −1 It updates (step S705). Note that the minimum value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the radio wave fraud alert timer is "0" (step S706).

  If the value of the radio wave injustice timer is not “0” (step S706; N), that is, if the time is not up, the board radio wave improper monitoring process is ended. If the value of the radio wave informing timer is "0" (step S706; Y), that is, if the time is up or the time has already been up, and the period of the informing notification ends, or from the beginning it is incorrect. If the notification has not been made, prepare a command to terminate the board radio wave illegal notification (step S 707), prepare a board radio wave illegality cancellation flag as the board radio wave illegality flag (step S 708), and the prepared board radio wave illegality flag It is determined whether the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area matches (step S709).

Then, if the prepared board radio wave fraud flag matches the value of the board radio wave fraud flag area (step S709; Y), the board radio wave fraud monitoring processing is ended. If the prepared board radio wave illegal flag does not match the value of the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S 709; N), the prepared board radio wave illegal flag is saved in the board radio wave illegal flag area (step S 710) The setting process is performed (step S711), and the board radio wave fraud monitoring process is ended.
Here, “step S701; N” → “step S705” → “step S706; Y” → “step S707” → “step S708” → “step S709; Y” are normal routes.

[External information editing process]
Next, details of the external information editing process (step S114) in the timer interrupt process described above will be described. In the external information editing process, the payout command transmission process (step S105), winning opening switch / state monitoring process (step S108), magnet fraud monitoring process (step S112), and board radio wave fraud monitoring process (step S113) Based on the information collecting terminal, external equipment such as the game arcade internal management device, and information to be output to the test shot testing device, processing is performed to set in the output buffer.

As shown in FIGS. 90 and 91, in the external information editing process, first, no glass frame opening error occurs (step S801; N) and no main body frame opening error occurs (step S802; N) The off data of the door / frame open signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S803), the off data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S804), and the process proceeds to step S807. .
On the other hand, when the glass frame opening error is occurring (step S801; Y) or when the main body frame opening error is occurring (step S802; Y), the on data of the door / frame opening signal is externally output. The data is saved in the information output data area (step S805), the on data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S806), and the process proceeds to step S807.

Then, if the security signal control timer, which measures a predetermined time (for example, 256 ms) from the time when the data stored in the RAM is initialized by the operation of the initialization switch or the like, is updated by -1 unless it is "0". Step S807). The initial value of the security signal control timer is set at the time of setting the initial value of the RAM when activated by clearing the RAM in the main processing, and the minimum value of the security signal control timer is set to “0”. Then, it is determined whether the value of the security signal control timer is "0" (step S808).
If the value of the security signal control timer is not "0" (step S808; N), that is, if the time is not up, the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area (step S809). Transfer to processing of If the value of the security signal control timer is “0” (step S 808; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already been up, the process of step S 810 is not performed and the process of step S 810 is performed. Transition.

  Then, if the magnet fraud is occurring (step S810; Y), if the board radio wave fraud is occurring (step S811; Y), if the frame radio wave fraud is occurring (step S812; Y), If the fraud is occurring (step S813; Y), or if the big winning opening fraud is occurring (step S814; Y), the on data of the security signal is saved in the external information output data area ( Step S816) The on data of the gaming machine error state signal is saved in the test signal output data area (step S817), and the process proceeds to step S818. That is, the occurrence of an error is output as external information.

  On the other hand, there is no magnet fraud (step S 810; N), no board radio fraud (step S 811; N), no frame radio fraud (step S 812; N), no generation of general electricity fraud (Step S813; N) If it is not even the occurrence of the big winning opening fraud (Step S814; N), the off data of the gaming machine error status signal is saved in the test signal output data area (Step S815). Transfer to processing.

Then, main prize ball signal editing processing (step S 818) is performed to set information on the number of prize balls scheduled to be paid out, and starting opening signal editing processing (step S 819) is performed to edit the winning opening signal of the starting opening.
Next, if the symbol determination number control timer for controlling the output time of the information related to the number of times of execution of the special figure variation display game is not “0”, −1 is updated (step S 820). The minimum value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the symbol determination number control timer is "0" (step S821).

If the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is "0" (step S821; Y), that is, if the time is up or has already expired, the off data of the symbol determination frequency signal is saved in the external information output data area Then, the external information editing process is ended (step S822).
Also, if the value of the symbol determination frequency control timer is not "0" (step S821; N), that is, if the time is not up, save the on data of the symbol determination frequency signal in the external information output data area (step S823), the external information editing process is ended.

[Main prize ball signal editing process]
Next, the details of the main prize ball signal editing process (step S 818) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The main prize ball signal editing process externally generates the main prize ball signal generated every time the number of prize balls (predetermined number of payouts) generated by the winning on the winning opening becomes a predetermined number (10 in the case of this embodiment). It is processing to output to the device.

  As shown in FIG. 92, in the main prize ball signal editing process, first, if the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S831). The minimum value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832). If the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is "0" (step S832; Y), it is determined whether the number of times the main prize ball signal output is "0" (step S833).

Then, if the main prize ball signal output number is not "0" (step S833; N), the main prize ball signal output number is updated by -1 (step S834), and the main prize ball signal control timer area is displayed. The signal output control timer initial value is saved (step S 835). The main prize ball signal output control timer initial value is the time between the on state (for example, high level) of the main prize ball signal (for example, 128 ms) and the time for the off state (for example, low level) (for example, 64 ms) It is an on-state time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the main prize ball signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S837), and the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.
If the main prize ball signal output count is "0" (step S833; Y), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM. (Step S838) The main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, if the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0" (step S832; N), it is determined whether the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836). The fact that the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period is that the value of the main prize ball signal output control timer is not "0". If the main prize ball signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S836; Y), the process proceeds to step S837. If the main prize ball signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S 836; N), the off data for turning off the main prize ball signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM. Then (step S838), the main prize ball signal editing process is ended.

In the present embodiment, a main prize ball signal is output from the game control device 100 every time the planned number of game balls to be paid out becomes 10, and the payout control device 200 comes to have 10 game balls paid out. A main prize ball signal is output each time.
Specifically, the game control apparatus 100 updates the main prize ball number signal output frequency by +1 (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) every 10 payout schedules (every time the payout command is transmitted), and updates (subroutine in the payout command transmission process) The main prize ball signal is output as many times as the number of outputs set.
Since the prize ball signal is transmitted from the payout control device 200 every time 10 pieces of payout are actually performed for the main prize ball signal outputted for each schedule, the schedule and the result can be matched, It is possible to respond to fraudulent withdrawals. In addition, even if you win during the big hit period, the payout is delayed due to a lack of balls, etc., and even if it is paid out after the big hit, the hall computer (hall computer) is accurate by the main prize ball signal output at the time of winning. Information can be collected (judged).

[Starting mouth signal editing process]
Next, details of the starting opening signal editing process (step S819) in the above-described external information editing process will be described. The start opening signal editing process is a process that is commonly performed for each input when there is an input from the start opening 1 switch 36a and the start opening 2 switch 37a.

  As shown in FIG. 93, in the starting opening signal editing process, first, if the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0", -1 is updated (step S841). The minimum value of the starting opening signal output control timer is set to "0". Then, it is determined whether the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842). When the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is "0" (step S842; Y), it is determined whether the number of times of starting opening signal output is "0" (step S843).

Then, if the starting opening signal output number is not "0" (step S843; N), the starting opening signal output number is updated by -1 (step S844), and the starting opening signal output control timer in the starting opening signal output control timer area. The initial value is saved (step S845). The starting opening signal output control timer initial value is the ON state (for example, high level) time (for example, 128 ms) of the starting opening signal and the time (for example, 64 ms) for the OFF state (for example, low level) It is on time (for example, 128 ms). Thereafter, the on data for turning on the starting opening signal is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S847), and the starting opening signal editing process is ended.
In addition, when the number of start opening signal outputs is "0" (step S843; Y), the off data for turning off the start opening signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of the RWM (step S 848), the start opening signal editing process is ended.

  On the other hand, when the value of the starting opening signal output control timer is not "0" (step S842; N), it is determined whether the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846). In addition, that a starting opening signal output control timer is in an output on area is that the value of a starting opening signal output control timer is not "0". When the starting opening signal output control timer is in the output on period (step S846; Y), the process proceeds to step S847. If the start-up signal output control timer is not in the output on period (step S846; N), the off data for turning off the start-up signal for the external device is saved in the external information output data area of RWM ( Step S848), the starting opening signal editing process is ended.

  Also, in place of the blinking control timer for controlling the display on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the common view display 53 in the collective display device 50, the special view 1 reserve display 54, The display may be controlled using a blink display timer for controlling the blinking state of the special view 2 reserve display 55 and the common view reserve display 56. In this case, a bit to be referred to in the blinking display timer area is selected in accordance with the display update timing required for the display on the special figure 1 display 51, the special figure 2 display 52, and the common view display 53 The display is sequentially updated depending on whether the bit is 0 or 1. By doing this, the switching timing of the display on the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, and the general view display 53 and the special view 1 reserve display 54, the special view 2 reserve display 55, It is also possible to synchronize with the switching timing of the light emission state in the blinking state in the figure suspension display 56, and the decorativeness can be improved.

  Next, control in the effect control device 300 will be described. The main control microcomputer (CPU) 311 of the effect control device 300 performs main processing shown in FIG. 94 and timer interrupt processing (not shown).

[Main processing]
As shown in FIG. 94, in the main processing, processing at the start of the program is performed first. In the process at the start of the program, first, the interrupt is inhibited (step C1), and the CPU is initialized (step C2). Next, the VDP 312 is initialized (step C3), and the interrupt is permitted (step C4). Next, generation of display data is permitted (step C5), a random number seed is set (step C6), and an initial value at power-on is saved in the area to be initialized (step C7). As a result, a power failure occurrence detected flag or the like is cleared.

  After the processing at the start of the program in steps C1 to C7 is performed, loop processing is performed as main loop processing. In this loop processing, first, WDT (watchdog timer) is cleared (step C8). Next, effect button input processing (step C9) is performed to create input information from an input signal (rising edge) based on the operation of the effect button 25 or the touch panel 29. Reading of the input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29 is performed in the timer interrupt process, and in the effect button input process, when there is an input from the effect button 25 and the touch panel 29, a process of changing the contents of the effect is performed.

  Then, a hall / player setting mode process is performed to receive operations such as setting of changeable ranges such as brightness of LED and liquid crystal and volume, and change of brightness and volume of LED and liquid crystal by the player (step C10). Next, a random number updating process (step C11) is performed to update the random number for determining the details of the variation mode of the decorative special view variation display game.

  Then, the command from the game control apparatus 100 is analyzed and a reception command check process (step C12) for handling is performed, and effect display editing process (step C13) for editing the setting for controlling the progression of the effect and the drawing command ) To set the end of preparation of the drawing command (step C14). In these processes, various data are updated according to the contents to be drawn, and the drawing data is finally set in the frame buffer. If drawing data of the screen to be drawn within 1/30 seconds (about 33.3 milliseconds) is prepared, the image can be updated without any problem.

  Then, it is determined whether it is the frame switching timing (step C15). In this embodiment, in order to create a system cycle (one frame 1/30 seconds), it is determined that it is the frame switching timing when the V blank interrupt (1/60 seconds) is entered twice. Note that the frame switching timing can be arbitrarily changed. For example, the image may be updated (frame switching) in 1/60 seconds, or the image may be updated in a timing later than 1/60 seconds (frame Switching) may be performed. If it is determined in step C15 that the frame switching timing is not reached (step C15; N), the processing in step C15 is repeated. On the other hand, when it is determined in step C15 that it is the frame switching timing (step C15; Y), screen drawing is instructed (step C17).

  Thereafter, sound control processing (step C17) for controlling the output of sound from the speakers (upper speaker 19a and lower speaker 19b), and control of LEDs such as the panel decoration device 46, the frame decoration device 18, and the sub information display device 90 A decoration control process (step C18) to be performed and a movable body control process (step C19) to control the motor and the solenoid of the panel effect device 44 are performed. Then, an initial operation process of setting an initial operation of the movable effect apparatus is performed (step C20), and the process returns to the process of clearing WDT (step C8).

[Receive command check process]
FIG. 95 shows the received command check process in the main process described above. In this reception command check process, first, the value of the command reception counter which counts how many commands are received during one frame (1/30 seconds) is loaded as the number of command reception (step C201), and the command reception is performed. It is determined whether the number is not 0 (step C202). When it is determined that the command reception number is 0 (step C202; N), the reception command check process is ended. If it is determined that the number of received commands is not 0 (step C202; Y), the content of the command reception counter area is subtracted by the number of received commands (step C203).

  Next, the contents of the reception command buffer are copied to the command area (step C204), and the command reading index is updated by +1 in the range of 0 to 31 (step C205). It is determined (step C206). As described above, in this embodiment, without analyzing the command directly in the reception command buffer, the content of the reception command buffer is copied to the command area (RAM area for analysis), and the command analysis work is performed in the command area. It is configured as follows. In this way, it is possible to move a command (data) to make a vacancy in preparation for a case where a command is transmitted from the game control device 100 during analysis of the command. In addition, analysis of commands can be performed collectively in one round of main processing.

  If it is determined in step C206 that copying of the commands for the number of received commands has not been completed (step C206; N), the processing returns to step C204. If it is determined that copying of the command for the number of received commands has been completed (step C206; Y), the contents of the command area are loaded (step C207), and a received command analysis process (step C208) is performed.

  Next, the address of the command area is updated (step C209), and it is determined whether the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210). When it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is not completed (step C210; N), the process returns to the process of step C207. If it is determined that the analysis of the command for the number of received commands is completed (step C210; Y), the received command check process is ended. As described above, in the reception command check process, commands received during one frame (1/30 seconds) are collectively analyzed. In this embodiment, up to 32 commands can be stored.

[Receive command analysis process]
FIG. 96 shows the received command analysis process in the received command check process described above. In this received command analysis process, first, the upper byte of the command is separated as MODE and the lower byte is separated as ACT (ACTION) (step C231), and it is determined whether MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232, step C233). ). If it is determined that MODE and ACT are within the normal range (step C232; Y, step C233; Y), it is determined whether ACT for MODE is a correct combination (step C234).

  If it is determined in step C232 or C233 that MODE or ACT is not within the normal range (step C232; N, step C233; N), or if it is determined in step C234 that ACT for MODE is not a correct combination (step In C234; N), the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If ACT is determined to be the correct combination in step C234 in step C234 (step C234; Y), it is determined whether MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235). The variation system command is a command for instructing a variation pattern of the special figure. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the variation system command (step C235; Y), variation system command processing (step C236) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C235 that MODE is not within the range of the variation system command (step C235; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the big hit system command (step C237). The big hit system command is a command for instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or a round screen) relating to a big hit medium effect, or a command instructing an operation (such as displaying a fanfare screen or an end screen) related to small hit medium effects. Then, if it is determined that MODE is in the range of the big hit system command (step C237; Y), the big hit system command processing (step C238) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C237 that MODE is not within the range of the big hit system command (step C237; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the symbol system command (step C239). The symbol system command is a command for instructing information on the symbol of the special drawing (for example, what to make the stop symbol of the special drawing, etc.). When it is determined that MODE is in the range of the symbol system command (step C239; Y), symbol system command processing (step C240) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C239 that MODE is not within the range of symbol system commands (step C239; N), it is determined whether or not MODE is within the range of one-shot commands such as pending number command or error command. (Step C241). A single-shot command is a command that is established independently, unlike a command that makes sense in combination, such as a symbol command and a variable command. The one-shot commands include a wait for customer demonstration command, a hold number command, a symbol stop command, a probability information command, an error / illegal command, a model specification command, and the like. Then, if it is determined that MODE is within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; Y), single-shot command processing (step C242) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C241 that MODE is not within the range of single-shot commands (step C241; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of prefetch symbol system commands (step C243). Then, if it is determined that MODE is the range of the pre-reading symbol system command (step C243; Y), the pre-reading symbol system command process (step C244) is performed, and the reception command analysis process is ended.

  If it is determined in step C243 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch symbol system command (step C243; N), it is determined whether MODE is within the range of the prefetch variation system command (step C245). If it is determined that MODE is within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; Y), the read change command process (step C246) is performed, and the received command analysis process is ended. If it is determined in step C245 that MODE is not within the range of the prefetch change command (step C245; N), the received command analysis process is ended.

  The preread variation system command and the preread symbol system command are commands including information necessary to execute the preread effect. The pre-reading effect (also referred to as pre-reading notice or pre-reading notice effect) is whether or not the special figure variation display game corresponding to the start memory (pending) not executed is a big hit when it is subsequently executed In order to notify the player in advance (with what kind of fluctuation pattern it will be) to the player with a predetermined reliability, performing the decoration special view start memory display etc. displayed on the display device 41 in a mode different from normal Effects such as effect display. And the pre-reading system command (pre-reading fluctuation system command and pre-reading symbol system command) is the command which notifies beforehand the fluctuation pattern and the stop design which corresponds to the starting memory which becomes the object of pre-reading effect, from starting game winning a prize 100 It is transmitted to the effect control device 300. In addition, the normal variation system command and symbol system command which are not pre-read are transmitted from the game control device 100 to the effect control device 300 at the time of the variation display start.

[Single-shot command processing]
FIG. 97 shows the one-shot system command processing in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this one-shot system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a model designation command including information on a model set in the game control device 100 (step C261). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a model designation command (step C261; Y), model setting processing is performed to rewrite internal information into model information corresponding to the command (step C262), and single-shot system command processing Finish.

  If it is determined in step C261 that MODE does not correspond to the model specification command (step C261; N), whether it corresponds to the RAM initialization command indicating that the RAM 111C has been initialized. It determines (step C263). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to the RAM initialization command (step C263; Y), the RAM initialization processing is performed (step C264), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the RAM initialization process (step C264), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and RAM initialization screen information is set. Further, scenario data for initializing the RAM is set in order to perform an effect when the initialization of the RAM is performed.

  If it is determined in step C263 that MODE does not correspond to the RAM initialization command (step C263; N), the MODE is a power failure recovery command indicating recovery from a power failure without initializing the RAM 111C. It is determined whether it is a corresponding one (step C265). When it is determined that MODE corresponds to a power failure recovery command (step C265; Y), power failure recovery processing is performed (step C266), and the one-shot system command processing is terminated. In the power failure recovery process (step C266), an area requiring initialization is initialized, and recovery screen information for displaying a power failure recovery screen is set. Furthermore, scenario data for power failure recovery is set in order to provide an effect upon power failure recovery.

  If it is determined in step C265 that MODE does not correspond to a power failure recovery command (step C265; N), it is determined whether MODE corresponds to a customer waiting demo command indicating the start of a customer waiting demo Step C267). When it is determined that the MODE corresponds to the customer waiting demo command (step C 267; Y), the customer waiting demonstration process is performed (step C 268), and the one-shot system command processing is ended. In the customer waiting demonstration process (step C268), the P machine (pachinko machine) state is set during the customer waiting demonstration, and customer waiting scenario data is set in order to perform customer waiting effects.

  If it is determined in step C267 that the MODE does not correspond to the customer waiting demo command (step C267; N), it is determined whether the MODE is the special view reservation (step C269). And, when MODE is special figure reservation (step C269; Y), the special figure corresponding to the processing which displays the decoration special figure starting memory indication which corresponds to the retention which it occurs on display unit 41 and which is digested A special view hold information setting process is performed to delete the start storage display (step C270), and the one-shot system command process is ended. In addition, according to the command, the processing is performed on either the special view 1 or the special view 2. That is, the effect control device 300 is a start storage display means for performing start storage notification display for displaying information related to the start storage by the start storage display (the decoration special view start storage display) corresponding to each start storage.

  If it is determined in step C269 that MODE does not correspond to the special-graph suspension (step C269; N), it is determined whether MODE is probability information (step C271). Then, when MODE is probability information (step C271; Y), probability information setting processing for setting the current probability state is performed (step C272), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  If MODE is not probability information in step C271 (step C271; N), it is determined whether MODE is error / illegal (step C273). If MODE is error / illegal (step C273; Y), error / illegal setting processing is performed to perform corresponding processing such as error notification (step C274), and the one-shot command processing ends.

  If it is determined in step C273 that MODE is not error / illegal (step C273; N), it is determined whether MODE is effect mode switching (step C275). Then, when MODE is effect mode switching (step C275; Y), effect mode switching processing is performed to switch the effect mode (step C276), and the one-shot system command processing ends.

  When MODE is not effect mode switching in step C275 (step C275; N), it is determined whether MODE is symbol stop (step C2777). Then, if MODE is not symbol stop (step C277; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. When MODE is symbol stop (step C277; Y), it is determined whether the command is normal (step C278). In the determination of whether the command is a normal command, for example, it is determined whether the target of the decoration special figure stop command is a target for the special figure currently changing.

  Then, if the command is not normal (step C278; N), the one-shot system command processing ends. If the command is normal (step C 278; Y), stop setting of the corresponding special view is made (step C 279), and if all symbols have stopped, set the machine state to special figure stop (step C280), complete one-shot command processing. As a result, the variable display of the corresponding decorative special game variable display game is stopped. The machine status indicates the current gaming state, and it may indicate a status such as a special figure change, a big hit, a small hit, etc., as well as being stopped during a special view, and an appropriate state may be set according to the situation. Be done.

[Design system command processing]
FIG. 98 shows symbol system command processing (step C240) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this symbol system command processing, first, the special figure type (either special figure 1 or special figure 2) corresponding to MODE is set (step C351), and the symbol type corresponding to the combination of MODE and ACT is set. Save (step C352), and complete the symbol system command processing.

  The symbol types are categories of symbols such as off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small hit symbol etc. It is associated with data. Since the symbol ratio changes in the special figure 1 and the special figure 2 (the probability change ratio is the same), this symbol type setting table is provided separately for each MODE, and it corresponds to the data of MODE from plural symbol type setting tables Is selected and the symbol type corresponding to ACT is set with reference to the table.

[Variable system command processing]
FIG. 99 shows variable system command processing (step C236) in the reception command analysis processing described above. In this variation system command processing, first, it is determined whether the special view type is undetermined (step C361). The special drawing type is information indicating whether the special drawing type is special drawing 1 or special drawing 2, and is information set in step C251 of the above-described symbol system command processing.

  If the special view type is undetermined (step C361; Y), the variable system command processing is ended. If the special figure type is not yet determined (step C361; N), that is, if the special figure type is set, the combination of the variation command and the symbol command is checked (step C362), and the variation command and the symbol type It is determined whether there is a mismatch (step C363).

  If the variation command and the symbol type do not match (step C363; Y), the variation system command processing ends. If the variation command and the symbol type are not inconsistent (step C363; N), the variation pattern type is determined from the variation command (step C364). A symbol type means a category of symbols, and the symbol types include, for example, off symbol, 16R positive variation A big hit symbol, 16R positive variation B big hit symbol, 16R normal A big hit symbol, 16R normal B big hit symbol, 4R positive variation big hit symbol, small There is a hit pattern etc. If the variation command and the symbol type do not match, perform the rendering as if you received the symbol command of the 16R definite variation A big hit symbol even though the variation command (variation pattern command) of loss was received It means that it is the combination (combination of the change command and the symbol type) which contradicts above.

  In the process of determining the change pattern type from the change command (step C364), the change pattern type which is a rough classification of the change display effect of the special view is determined according to the received command. And the fluctuation production setting processing which sets up the information in order to do the production which responds to the fluctuation command is done (step C365).

  Next, the special figure variation is set as the P machine state (the state of the pachinko machine) (step C366). Here, “during special figure fluctuation” indicates that the special figure is fluctuating (during a customer demonstration or during a big hit, or not being a fanfare medium grade). Further, if the pre-reading effect frequency (pre-reading execution frequency) is not zero, the pre-reading effect frequency is updated by 1 (processing to reduce the pre-reading effect frequency by 1) (step C367), and the variation system command processing is ended.

[Change production setting process]
FIG. 100 shows the fluctuation effect setting process (step C365) in the above-mentioned fluctuation system command process. In this variation production setting process, first, it is determined whether or not the variation pattern type is a no reach variation (step C381). If the change pattern type is no reach change (step C381; Y), the model code, the special figure type, and the first-half advance notice group address table corresponding to the effect mode at that time are set (step C382). In addition, since it is a reach no change, symbol classification is always a lost pattern, and it is not necessary to refer to symbol classification here especially. The effect mode corresponds to a game mode managed by the effect control device 300, and naturally varies depending on the model, but here, there are a normal mode, a probability change mode, a time saving mode, a latency mode and the like. Furthermore, in each mode, a plurality of modes are provided in which the distribution rate of the notice effect and the effect mode of the decoration special view variable display game on the display device 41 are made different.

  Next, the address of the first half notice distribution group table corresponding to the number of holdings of MODE, special view type is acquired with reference to the first half notice distribution group address table (step C383). Thus, in the case of no reach fluctuation, it is possible to change the lottery contents of the notice effect (specifically, the appearance rate of each notice effect mode) appearing during each change according to the number of reservations. Thereafter, a first half notice setting process is performed to set a notice appearing during the first half fluctuation (step C386).

  On the other hand, if the change pattern type is not reach-less change (step C381; N), the first half notice distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special view type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C384). Then, the address of the first half advance distribution group table corresponding to the MODE, fluctuation pattern type is acquired with reference to the first half advance distribution group address table (step C 385), and the notice appearing in the first half change is set The first half notice setting process is performed (step C386).

  Next, a lottery is made for the second half of the change. In addition, with the second half change of the special figure fluctuation indicatory game fluctuation indication with the so-called reach action (for example, the special result feature (combination of the special design) where the display territory excluding the specific territory becomes large hitting among the display territory of the special figure) Is stopped, and it is a variable display of the state which is fluctuating display only in a specific field. On the other hand, the first half fluctuation of the special figure fluctuation display game is the fluctuation display before the start of the reach action.

  First, the second half of the previous day distribution group address table corresponding to the model code, the special drawing type, the effect mode and the symbol type is set (step C387). The second half prior distribution group address table is a table for selecting the address of the second half previous distribution group table. Then, the address of the second half of the previous day sorting group table corresponding to the ACT is acquired by referring to the second half of day prior sorting distribution group address table (step C 388), and the second half is fluctuating (reaching) using the second half day of sorting distribution group table A lottery for appearing notices is made (step C389).

  Thereafter, the contents of the fluctuation effect corresponding to MODE and ACT are determined (step C390), and it is determined whether the P machine state is in the special figure fluctuation (step C391). If the state of machine P is not in the special figure change (step C391; N), the content of the effect corresponding to the preliminary lottery result is determined (step C395). As a result, effects such as the variation time and main reach content of the decorative special figure variation display game, and the notice, the display mode of the storage display unit 84 during execution, and the like are determined. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes an under-execution storage display control means for controlling the under-execution storage display that displays information on the starting storage corresponding to the game being executed.

  On the other hand, when the machine status is in the special figure fluctuation (step C391; Y), it is replaced by the fluctuation effect including the display of the out result (step C392), and displayed on the display device 41 for the display time of the out result. A hold update waiting flag is set to hold update such as the decoration special drawing start memory display (step C393). Then, in the variation special display variation display game, an initial value corresponding to the display time of the out result is set in the variation standby timer for waiting for the start of the variation display of the second ornament game performed on the sub information display device 90. Then (step C394), the process proceeds to step C395.

  In this case, the stop command for the previous special feature variation display game can not be received for some reason, and the variable command for the next special feature variation display game is received. That is, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the previous game, the start information of the next game is received without receiving the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game.

  Therefore, since the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the previous special figure fluctuation display game is not stopped, the special special game fluctuation display game corresponding to the next special figure fluctuation display game has not been started. After the result corresponding to the figure fluctuation display game is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time, it is replaced with the fluctuation effect for starting the effect corresponding to the next special figure fluctuation display game. It should be noted that since the next special figure fluctuation display game fluctuation command is received following the previous special figure fluctuation display game, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is out, so that the out result is displayed. Do.

  In addition, during the period in which the result corresponding to the previous special view variation display game is displayed, the display mode of the in-execution storage display unit 84 is also continued to display corresponding to the previous special view variation display game. Is made to be displayed corresponding to the next special figure variation display game. Further, as will be described later, updating of the decorative special drawing start storage display and the like is also performed with the elapse of a period in which the result corresponding to the previous special drawing fluctuation display game is displayed. That is, a period occurs in which the special figure variation display game in the game control device 100 and the decorative special figure variation display game in the effect control device 300 are not synchronized.

  Thereafter, stop symbol setting processing is performed to determine a stop symbol with reference to the determined change pattern (such as reach effect) of the special view change display game and the advance notice content (step C396). Next, display setting of the fluctuation effect is performed (step C397), and display setting of the notice effect is performed (step C398). By these processes, it is possible to execute an effect or a notice in the decoration special figure variation display game set as described above. Then, a sound number which is a BGM number, a decoration number which is a number indicating the type of effect by a decoration lamp or the like are set (step C399), and the variation effect setting process is ended.

  In addition, about the change display about the 1st decoration game performed with the display apparatus 41 among the decoration special figure change display games, the setting of a display content is performed in the display setting of the change production of step C397. Further, the variation display of the second decoration game performed by the sub information display device 90 in the decoration special figure variation display game is performed in a sub information display device control process described later.

[Big hit system command processing]
FIG. 101 shows the jackpot system command processing (step C238) in the above-mentioned reception command analysis processing. In this big hit system command processing, first, it is determined whether MODE is a fanfare (step C411). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a fanfare command or a small hit fanfare command corresponding to symbol information (stop symbol number or stop symbol pattern). When the MODE is a fanfare (step C411; Y), a fanfare effect corresponding to the type of the fanfare command is set (step C412). As a result, the setting of the fanfare display image according to the big hit type and the small hit is performed.

  Next, it is determined whether the P-machine state is in the special figure fluctuation (step C413). If the state of machine P is not in the process of special figure fluctuation (step C413; N), the state of machine P is set in the fanfare (step C415), and the big hit system command processing ends. If the status of the P-machine is in the special figure variation (Step C413; Y), the fan-fare effect including the display of the special result according to the type of the fan-fare command is substituted (Step C414). It sets (step C415), and ends the big hit system command processing.

  In the case where the state of the aircraft is not in the special figure stop state, the fanfare command is received because the stop command for the previous special figure variation display game can not be received for some reason. That is, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the previous game, without receiving the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game, the fanfare command which is the special gaming state start information is received. is there.

  Therefore, since the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the previous special figure fluctuation display game is not stopped, the result corresponding to the previous special figure fluctuation display game from the start of the fanfare period is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time It is replaced to the production which starts fanfare production after it is done. In addition, since the fanfare command is received following the previous special view fluctuation display game, the result of the previous special view fluctuation display game is a big hit or a small hit, and the display of the big hit or small hit result corresponding to the fanfare command Let's do it. In addition, during the period in which the result corresponding to the previous special view variation display game is displayed, the display mode of the in-execution storage display unit 84 is also continued to display corresponding to the previous special view variation display game. At the same time, the display of the ongoing storage display unit 84 is ended. That is, a period occurs in which the special figure variation display game in the game control device 100 and the decorative special figure variation display game in the effect control device 300 are not synchronized.

  If the MODE is not a fanfare (Step C411; N), it is determined whether the MODE is a round (Step C416). That is, it is determined whether the received command is a round command corresponding to the number of rounds in the special game state. Then, if MODE is a round (step C416; Y), a round effect setting process of updating the number-of-rounds display information is performed (step C417), and the P machine state is set during the round (step C418), End the jackpot system command processing.

  If MODE is not a round (Step C416; N), it is determined whether MODE is an interval (Step C419). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an interval command related to an interval between rounds. Then, when MODE is an interval (step C419; Y), an interval effect setting process is performed to set effects during the interval (step C420), and the P machine state is set during the interval (step C421). End system command processing. If MODE is not an interval (step C419; N), it is determined whether MODE is ending (step C422). That is, it is determined whether the received command is an ending command related to ending after the final round.

  If the MODE is not the ending (step C422; N), the jackpot system command processing ends. If MODE is ending (step C422; Y), for example, if the high probability state is reached after the end of the special game state, the screen information to notify that the high probability state is set, etc. Ending effect setting processing for setting screen information corresponding to the gaming state after the big hit is performed (step C423), the P machine state is set during ending (step C424), and the big hit system command processing is ended.

[Customer waiting demo setting process]
FIG. 102 shows the customer waiting demo setting process (step C268) in the above-described one-shot system command process. In the customer waiting demo setting process, first, a customer waiting demonstration effect which is an effect to be executed while waiting for a customer is set (step C431), and it is determined whether the P machine state is in a special figure change (step C432). If the machine status is not in the special view fluctuation state (step C432; N), the P machine status is set to the customer waiting demo (step C434), and the customer waiting demo setting process is ended.

  If the status of machine P is in a special figure change (step C432; Y), substitute the customer waiting demonstration effect including display of the out result (step C433), and set the status of machine P during customer waiting demo (step C433) Step C434) The customer waiting demo setting process is ended.

  In this case, the customer waiting demo command is received for some reason without receiving the stop command for the previous special feature variable display game. That is, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the previous game, the special view change display game can be started without receiving the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game. It is a case where the customer waiting demo command which is standby information transmitted when starting conditions are not satisfied.

  Therefore, since the decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the previous special figure variation display game is not stopped, the result corresponding to the previous special figure variation display game from the start of the customer waiting state is stopped for a predetermined time After being displayed, it is replaced by the effect of starting the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, since the customer waiting demo command is received continuing to the previous special figure fluctuation display game, the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is a loss, and the display of the removal result is performed. In addition, during the period in which the result corresponding to the previous special view variation display game is displayed, the display mode of the in-execution storage display unit 84 is also continued to display corresponding to the previous special view variation display game. At the same time, the display of the ongoing storage display unit 84 is ended. That is, a period occurs in which the special figure variation display game in the game control device 100 and the decorative special figure variation display game in the effect control device 300 are not synchronized.

  In the case of receiving the change command for the next special figure change display game without receiving the stop command for the previous special figure change display game, the case of receiving the fanfare command, or the case of receiving the customer waiting demo command, In any case, the result corresponding to the previous special view variable display game is displayed after that, but the result may be displayed only in one or two of these cases.

[Special map hold information setting process]
FIG. 103 shows the special figure hold information setting process (step C270) in the above-described one-shot system command process. In this special view reserve information setting process, first, the currently stored special view reserve number for the special figure (special figure 1 or special figure 2) to be processed corresponding to the received command is loaded as the previous reserve number (step C501) The value of the command is set in the special drawing pending number as the new pending number (step C502), and it is determined whether the new pending number and the previous pending number are the same (step C503).

  When the number of new holdings and the number of previous holdings are the same (step C503; Y), the processing for setting the special information holding information ends. If the new holding number and the previous holding number are not the same (step C503; N), it is determined whether the holding number has increased (step C504). Then, when the number of reservations is increased (step C504; Y), the display pattern of the suspension normal lighting is set in the color information area corresponding to the new number of reservations (step C505). Thereby, the display in the normal display mode in which the pre-reading advance notice effect or the like is not performed is set for the decorative special drawing start storage display corresponding to the start storage generated this time. The pre-reading notice effect in the special drawing start memory display is set by the pre-reading variation system command processing.

  Furthermore, the index of the motion control table for suspension corresponding to the new number of reservations is calculated and saved (step C506), and scenario layer number 6 is prepared (step C510). Next, the address of the special chart holding scenario data table (X holdings) is prepared (step C511), and scenario data setting processing is performed (step C512). By this process, the display of the decoration special drawing start memory display accompanying the increase in the number of reservations and the decoration display (animation) accompanying this are set.

  On the other hand, if the number of reservations has not increased (step C504; N), that is, if it has decreased, there is a pending update wait flag for making the decoration special view start memory display wait for updating for the display time of the out result. It is determined (step C507). If the pending update waiting flag is not present (step C507; N), the process proceeds to step C506 and the subsequent processes are performed. By this processing, deletion of the decoration special drawing start memory display accompanying reduction of the number of reservations and decoration display (animation) accompanying this are set. It should be noted that, with the decrease in the number of reservations, a process of shifting the special drawing pre-reading information area or shifting the color information area of the decorative special drawing start storage display is also performed.

  If there is a pending update standby flag (step C507; Y), the index of the pending motion control table including the updating standby period is calculated (step C508), and the pending update standby flag is cleared (step C509). The process after step C510 is performed. Although this process sets the deletion of the decoration special drawing start memory display along with the decrease in the number of reservations and the decoration display (animation) accompanying this, in the process of step C508, the decoration special for the display time of the out result is displayed. After waiting for the update of the figure start memory display, the display for reducing the decoration special figure start memory display is set. In addition, the process of shifting the color information area of the special drawing look-ahead information area and the decoration special drawing start storage display according to the reduction of the number of reservations is also set to be performed after waiting for the display time of the disconnection result. That is, the effect control device 300 constitutes a start storage display control means for controlling start storage display for displaying information on the start storage stored in the start storage means (game control device 100).

  Next, the sub information display device 90 will be described. As shown in FIG. 104 (a), the sub information display device 90 includes a first sub game display unit 91 and a second sub game display unit 92 for displaying a second decoration game in the decoration special view variable display game. The first sub game display unit 91 forms a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the first special view variable display game, and is a single light emitting unit L5. It is configured. Further, the second sub game display unit 92 is a sub game display unit for displaying a fourth symbol for executing the decorative special view variable display game corresponding to the second special view variable display game, and is a single light emitting unit It consists of L6.

  Furthermore, a first sub display unit 93 indicating the number of first start memories, which is the right to execute the first special view variation display game by two light emitting units L1 and L2, and a second special display by two light emitting units L3 and L4. And a second sub display unit 94 indicating the number of second start memories, which is the right to execute the figure variation display game. In addition, although the code | symbol of L1-L6 is displayed on each light emission part in FIG. 104 (a) for description, it may or may not actually display.

  FIG. 104 (b) shows display modes in the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94. Each of the display units is configured to display the number of reservations by two light emitting units, and in the case of the number of reservations 0, any one is turned off, in the case of number 1 the one is turned off and the other is lit. In the case of the number of holdings 3, one is lit and the other blinks, and in the case of the number of holdings 4, both are blinked.

  Such a display mode is selected every about 133 ms by selecting the special view 1 shown in FIG. 104 (c) and the special view 2 sub hold count display tables 1 and 2 according to the value of bit 2 of the sub blink display timer area. The table is alternately selected, and the selected table is realized by referring to the current number of reservations and setting the corresponding display mode.

  The sub-flashing display timer according to the present embodiment uses the 8-bit sub-flashing display timer area provided in the RAM 322 or the like to update +1 in the decoration control process (step C18) performed every frame switching timing (1/30 second). It consists of. Then, it is determined whether or not the output of bit 2 of the sub blink display timer area is on timing (is 1), and the sub hold number display table is selected. Since the value of bit 2 is switched between 0 and 1 every about 133 ms, it is possible to control turn-off and turn-on in units of about 133 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control turning off and on in units of shorter or longer time with reference to other bits.

  FIG. 104 (c) shows the contents of each of the sub-holding number display tables 1 and 2. As shown in FIG. 104 (b), the display modes corresponding to the number of reservations in each display unit are the same, and the contents of the sub-holding number display table are also the same. The special view 1 sub hold display tables 1 and 2 control the display modes of L1 and L2, and the special view 2 sub hold display tables 1 and 2 control the display modes of L3 and L4.

  For example, in the case of the number of holdings 1, L 1 and L 3 are turned off by selecting both lights off in sub holding display tables 1 and 2 and L 2 and L 4 are turned off in both holding displays 1 and 2 It becomes a lighting state by being selected. Further, in the case of the number of holdings 3, lighting is selected for both L1 and L3 in the sub-holding display tables 1 and 2 and the lighting state is achieved. With respect to L2 and L4, lighting is selected in the hold display table 1, and in the sub-hold display table 2, turning off is selected, so that lighting and turning off are repeated at approximately every 133 ms.

  That is, if the value of the sub blink display timer is in a predetermined turn-off range (here, the range of bit 2 is 0) when it is set to be in the blink state, it is turned off and other than the turn-off range (here, the range of bit 2 is 1) If so, turn it on. Further, in the display mode of at least the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94, the turn-off range in the case of the blinking state is a common range.

  Furthermore, the sub blink display timer is constantly updated, and even if the number of reservations changes, the sub blink display timer is not reset or another value is not set. Therefore, when shifting to the blinking state, the light emitting state is either lighting or extinguishing according to the value of the sub blinking display timer after the number of holding changes. For example, L1 and L3 change from lit state to blinked state when changing from 3 pending numbers to 4 pending numbers, but the value of the sub blink display timer at the time of change is the value that selects the sub hold display table 1 (bit When 2 is 1), lighting is continued, and when 2 is a value for selecting the sub hold display table 2 (bit 2 is 0), it is turned off immediately.

  In addition, when the number of reservations changes and shifts from blinking to lighting, the value of the sub blink display timer after the number of reservations changes is the value for selecting the sub suspension display table 1 (bit 2 is 1). If there is, lighting will be continued, and if it is a value for selecting the sub hold display table 2 (bit 2 is 0), it will be changed from lighting to lighting immediately. That is, when the blinking state ends, if the current light emitting state is different from the transitioned light emitting state, the light emitting state is immediately changed. In this case, there is no case of transition from the blinking state to the extinguished state, but if there is such a transition, extinguishing is maintained if the current light emitting state is extinguished as described above, and the current light emitting state is If it is on, it will be changed to off immediately.

  In the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, the light emitting unit L5 or L6 is blinked to indicate that the fluctuation display is being performed during the fluctuation display of the corresponding special view fluctuation display game. The display during the variable display is realized by switching on and off about every 133 ms according to the value of bit 2 of the sub blink display timer area as shown in FIG. 104 (d). The on and off periods in the blink display are synchronized with the on and off periods in the blink display on the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94.

  In addition, the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 display the game result as the lighting mode or the lighting color according to the game result along with the end of the corresponding special view variable display game. In the case of the present embodiment, as shown in FIG. 104 (e), the light is turned off in the case of deviation, and the light is turned on in the case of big hit or small hit. In addition, the display mode in the case of the small hit may be a display mode different from the removal or the big hit. For example, you may make it blink in the aspect different from the blink in fluctuation | variation. Further, in the sub game display unit which is not executing the corresponding special view variation display game, the display of the previous result is maintained.

  By controlling the light emission mode as described above, the blinking timing is synchronized in the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94, The visibility of the display and the decorativeness are enhanced. In addition, blinking control of a plurality of light emitting units can be performed by one sub blinking display timer, and the burden of control can be reduced. That is, the effect control device 300 controls the sub information display device 90 and forms a sub blink display timer for controlling a period in which the light is turned off and a period in which the light is lit in the blink state.

[Sub information display control process]
FIG. 105 shows the sub information display device control process performed in the decoration control process (step C18) in the main process (see FIG. 94). In this sub information display device control processing, first, the sub blink display timer is updated by +1 (step C 701), and it is determined whether or not the output of a specific bit in the sub blink display timer area is on (is 1). (Step C702). As described above, the sub blink display timer according to the present embodiment is configured by performing +1 update in the decoration control processing performed every 1/30 seconds using the 8-bit sub blink display timer region, and the sub blink display timer region It is determined whether or not the output of bit 2 of (1) is on timing. Since the value of bit 2 is switched between 0 and 1 every about 133 ms, it is possible to control turn-off and turn-on in units of about 133 ms. Of course, it is also possible to control turning off and on in units of shorter or longer time with reference to other bits.

  In the case of output on timing (step C702; Y), the special view 1 sub hold number display of the special view 1 sub hold number display tables 1 and 2 in which the display mode in the first sub display unit 93 is defined. Table 1 is set (step C703), and when it is not the output on timing (step C702; N), the special figure 1 sub hold number display table 2 is set (step C704). Then, display data corresponding to the special drawing 1 sub display holding number is acquired from the set special drawing 1 sub holding number display table and saved in the segment area corresponding to the first sub display unit 93 (step C705). In addition, the special figure 1 sub display reservation number is set by special figure reservation information setting processing (refer to Figure 103), here, the value which always matches the actual number of 1st starting memory is set It is supposed to be

  Next, it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step C706), and in the case of the output on timing (step C706; Y), the special view 2 sub retention with which the display mode in the second sub display section 94 is defined. Of the number display tables 1 and 2, the special figure 2 sub hold number display table 1 is set (step C 707), and when it is not the output on timing (step C 706; N), the special figure 2 sub hold number display table 2 It sets (step C708). Then, display data corresponding to the special figure 2 sub display pending number is acquired from the set special figure 2 sub holding number display table, and saved in the segment area corresponding to the second sub display unit 94 (step C709). In addition, the special figure 2 sub display reservation number is set by special figure reservation information setting processing (refer to Figure 103), here, the value which always matches the actual number of 2nd starting memory is set It is supposed to be

  As for the special figure 1 sub display reserve number and the special figure 2 sub display reserve number, when the sub view reserve number of the corresponding special figure is updated to the new reserve number in the special figure reserve information setting process (step C502) It will be the value of the new pending number. However, if there is a pending update waiting flag, updating is performed after waiting for the display time of the deviation result, and updating of the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 of the sub information display device 90 It is also possible to wait.

  Next, if the sub variation display timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C710). The sub fluctuation display timer manages the fluctuation time of the decoration special drawing fluctuation display game corresponding to the special drawing fluctuation display game, and at the start of the special drawing fluctuation display game, the initial corresponding to the fluctuation time of the special drawing fluctuation display game The value is set. However, the fluctuation display is not stopped only by the sub fluctuation display timer becoming 0 (time up), and the fluctuation display is stopped by the reception of the stop command.

  Next, if the fluctuation standby timer is not 0, -1 is updated (step C711). The fluctuation standby timer is a time to display the result of the previous game at the start of the fluctuation display, and controls the time for waiting the start of the fluctuation display, and the time to display the result of the previous game is set The initial value corresponding to this time is set to.

  Thereafter, it is determined whether the state of the P aircraft is in the special figure fluctuation (step C712). When the status of machine P is not in the special figure variation (step C712; N), the result display table (see FIG. 104 (e)) is set (step C713), and the display data corresponding to the result is acquired and the corresponding segment The area is saved (step C714), and the sub information display control process ends. As a result, the result mode corresponding to the result of the special view variable display game is displayed.

  If the state of the P-machine is in the special figure fluctuation (step C712; Y), it is determined whether the fluctuation standby timer is 0 (step C715). If the fluctuation standby timer is not 0 (step C715; Y), display data corresponding to the removal result is acquired (step C716), and the sub information display device control process is ended. In this case, since the result of the previous game is displayed on the display device 41, the sub information display device 90 also displays the result of the removal as the result of the previous game. It is a sub game display unit corresponding to the special game type of the previous game among the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 that displays the result of the detachment by this processing. The game display unit maintains a state in which the latest result in the special drawing type corresponding to the sub game display unit is displayed.

  When the fluctuation standby timer is 0 (step C715; Y), it is determined whether it is the output on timing (step C717). When the output on timing is reached (step C717; Y), the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 of the light emitting unit of the display unit corresponding to the special view variation display game being executed. Lighting is set (step C718), and the sub information display control process ends. When the output is not on (step C717; N), the light emitting unit of the display unit corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed out of the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is turned off. Are set (step C718), and the sub information display control process ends. As a result, during the variable display, the light emitting unit of the display unit corresponding to the special figure change display game being executed among the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is in a blinking state. That is, the effect control device 300 serves as a display control means for controlling the display of the sub information display device 90.

  In any of the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the display device 41 which is the first decoration game and the decoration special figure variation display game displayed on the sub information display apparatus 90 which is the second decoration game, When the change command for the next special figure change display game is received without receiving the stop command for the figure change display game, the fanfare command is received, the customer waiting demo command is received, or the like in any case. Although the result corresponding to the previous special view variation display game is displayed, the result may be displayed by only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game.

  For example, when the change command for the next special figure change display game is received without being able to receive the stop command for the previous special figure change display game, the result is obtained by only one of the first decoration game and the second decoration game. On the other hand, the variable display corresponding to the next special figure variable display game, fanfare effect, customer waiting demonstration effect may be started. When the variable display corresponding to the next special figure variable display game is to be started in the first decorative game, the process of step C392 is not performed. In the second decoration game, when the variable display corresponding to the next special drawing fluctuation display game is to be started, the process of step C715, 716 is not performed, and the state of the P aircraft is in the special drawing fluctuation. If (step C712; Y), the process proceeds to step C717.

  In addition, when the fanfare command is received without receiving the stop command for the previous special view variation display game, the first decoration game starts the fanfare effect without displaying the result in the stop mode, the step The processing of C413 and C414 is not performed. In addition, when the customer waiting demo command is received without being able to receive the stop command for the previous special figure fluctuation display game, the first decoration game is to start the customer waiting effect without displaying the result in the stop display. Causes the process of steps C432 and 433 not to be performed.

  From the above, in the gaming machine, the game in which the identification information is variably displayed is executed based on the establishment of the start condition, and when the result of the game becomes a special result, the gaming machine generates a state advantageous to the player. Controlled by the game control means (game control device 100) for controlling the game in an integrated manner, the effect control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the effect based on the information from the game control means, and the game control means The information display device (collective display device 50) for displaying information related to gaming, and the sub information display device 90 controlled by the effect control means and displaying information related to gaming by the light emitter, the game control means being in the extinguished state The information display apparatus is configured to display information about the game by controlling the light emitter in any one or both of the lighting state, the lighting state, and the blinking state, and the blinking It has a blink display timer (game control device 100) for controlling a light off period and a light on period in the state, and in the case of blinking, if the value of the blink display timer is a predetermined light off range, the light is off Is configured to be controlled to light if it is out of the predetermined turn-off range, and the blink display timer is constantly updated regardless of whether it is in the blink state or not and the start is started when the blink state is started. It starts from the light emission state according to the value of the blink display timer at the hour, and changes the light emission state immediately when the current light emission state and the transition light emission state are different when the blink state ends. It will be done. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced. Further, by providing the sub information display device 90, it is possible to more reliably notify the player of information on the game.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured to control the light-emitting body in any state of either one or both of the light-off state and the lighting state and the blinking state to sub-information about the game A sub-blinking display timer (effect control device 300) for controlling the light-off period and the light-off period in the blinking state is provided to be displayed on the display device 90. It is configured to control to turn off if the value of the display timer is in a predetermined off range, and to turn on if it is out of the predetermined off range, regardless of whether it is blinking or not. Always update and when flashing starts, start from the flash status according to the value of the sub flash display timer at the start, and when the flash status ends, shift to the current flash status Departure If the state is different becomes immediately it has to change the light emission state. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced.

  In addition, the start memory which becomes the right to execute the game based on the detection of the game ball in the flow area where the flow of game balls can be detected (the start winning opening 36, the normal fluctuation winning device 37, the common drawing start gate 34) And a game execution unit (game control apparatus 100) for executing a game based on the start storage stored in the start storage unit, The area includes a first inflow area and a second inflow area, and the start storage means stores the first start memory as the start storage based on the detection of the gaming ball in the first inflow area, and the second inflow The second starting memory is stored as the starting memory based on the detection of the gaming ball in the area, and the game executing means executes the first game based on the first starting memory, and the second starting memory is based on the second starting memory. To run 2 games The effect control means (effect control device 300) displays the number of first start memories on the first sub display unit 93 of the sub information display device 90, and the number of second start memories is the sub information display device The game is displayed on the second sub display unit 94 of 90 and displayed at least in a blinking state on the sub game display units 91 and 92 of the sub information display device 90, and the first sub display unit 93 and the second sub display unit 94 are displayed. The sub game display unit 91, 92 controls the blinking state using a common sub blinking display timer. Therefore, processing such as setting or resetting the timer value is not necessary at the transition to the blinking state or the transition from the blinking state, and the control load can be reduced.

  Further, the effect control means (effect control device 300) is configured such that the first sub-display unit 93, the second sub-display unit 94, and the sub game display units 91 and 92 have a predetermined turn-off range as a common range. Become. Therefore, the blinking state can be synchronized by the plurality of display units, and the decorativeness and the visibility can be improved.

  Although the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 perform display using a single light emitting unit, display may be performed using a plurality of light emitting units. For example, two light emitting units are provided so as to blink alternately during variable display. In addition, as a display of the result mode, only one of the two may be turned on in the case of a break, and only the other may be turned on in the case of a hit. Of course, display may be performed by three or more light emitting units. Moreover, in the above-mentioned embodiment, although the sub game display part is divided into the 1st sub game display part 91 and the 2nd sub game display part 92, the 1st special figure fluctuation display game and one sub game display part It is also possible to display a decoration special figure variation display game corresponding to the second special figure variation display game.

  Further, in the game control apparatus 100, a blinking display timer for controlling the blinking state of the special view 1 suspension display 54, the special view 2 suspension display 55, and the common view suspension display 56 of the batch display device 50; In order to control the blinking state of the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94 in the device 300, the sub blink display timer is synchronized. Also good.

  That is, the update period of the blink display timer and the update period of the sub blink display timer are made the same, and the same initial value is set at a predetermined timing so that the values always become the same. Thus, if the bit referred to by each and the range to be turned off are made the same, the special figure 1 reserve indicator 54, the special figure 2 reserve indicator 55, the general view reserve indicator 56, the first sub game indicator It becomes possible to synchronize the blinking state of any light emitting portion among the 91, the second sub game display portion 92, the first sub display portion 93 and the second sub display portion 94, and the decorativeness and the visibility are improved. Further, even if the reference bit and the range to be turned off are not the same, it is possible to blink with a predetermined periodicity, which also improves the decorativeness and the visibility.

  In the above description, the first sub game display unit 91, the second sub game display unit 92, the first sub display unit 93, and the second sub display unit 94 use the same sub blink display timer and turn off the blink state. By making the periods the same, all are synchronized, but it is also possible to use separate sub blink display timers for some or all of these display parts, or to synchronize as the turn-off period of the blinking state is different. You may not do it.

  Further, in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, the light emission mode according to the result is immediately transitioned with the end of the fluctuation time displayed in the blinking state, but the light emission immediately before the transition When the state and the light emitting state according to the result are different, the current light emitting state may be maintained until the light emitting state matching the light emitting state according to the result is achieved. For example, when the light emission state immediately before transition is on but the result is off and it is necessary to shift to off, the value of the bit (here, bit 2) to be referred to in the sub blink display timer area changes and the on period The lighting is maintained until the end of the lighting, and then the lighting is turned off corresponding to the result mode of the shifting. In this way, the light emission state changes in synchronization with the blinking display on the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 at the end of the variable display, and the decorativeness and the visibility are improved. .

  Furthermore, even when the variable display starts, if the light emission state corresponding to the previous result currently displayed is different from the light emission state corresponding to the value of the sub blink display timer area, until both light emission states match. The start of the variable display may be delayed. For example, if the light emission state corresponding to the previous result currently being displayed is the light off corresponding to the out, and when the light emission state turns on according to the value of the blink display timer area when shifting to the blink state, the blink display timer According to the value of the region, it is made not to shift to the blinking state until the start of the light-off period in which the light emission state is turned off. In this way, the light emission state changes in synchronization with the blinking display on the first sub display unit 93 or the second sub display unit 94 at the start of the variable display, and the decorativeness and the visibility are improved. .

  The control to synchronize the blinking state at the start and end of such variable display is performed by the batch display device 50 in the special view 1 display 51, the special view 2 display 52, the general view display 53, and the special view display 53. It is also applicable to the case where the display is controlled using the common blink display timer in order to control the blinking state in FIG. 1 hold display 54, special view 2 hold display 55, and general drawing hold display 56. It is.

  In addition, although the fluctuation stop in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 is performed upon reception of the stop command, either the reception of the stop command or the time-up of the sub fluctuation display timer is earlier. It is also possible to stop the variable display. Furthermore, as described above, in the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92, when the light emission state immediately before the transition is different from the light emission state according to the result, the light emission state according to the result is The current light emission state may be maintained until the light emission state is matched, but such control is performed only when the fluctuation display is ended based on the sub fluctuation display timer having timed out, and stop When the variable display is ended by the reception of the command, the light emission state may be immediately made according to the result regardless of the current light emission state. Of course, when the fluctuation display is ended by the reception of the stop command, the current light emission state may be maintained until it becomes the light emission state corresponding to the light emission state according to the result, or the sub fluctuation display timer has timed up. It is also possible to immediately set the light emission state according to the result only when the variable display is ended based on the above.

  Next, the effect display on the display device 41 will be described. FIG. 106 shows an example of the decoration display (animation) when the starting memory is digested and reduced. As shown in FIG. 106 (a), at the center of the display area of the display device 41, an ornament special game variation display game display unit 85 for displaying an ornament special game variation display game (first ornament game) is provided. Here, the decorative feature variation display game is displayed by variably displaying identification information in each of the left, middle, and right variation display areas and then displaying the identification information in a stopped state.

  Further, at the lower center of the display area, there is provided a storage display unit 83 for displaying a decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the start storage. The storage display unit 83 is provided with a first storage display unit 83a for displaying the first start storage and a second storage display unit 83b for displaying the second start storage. The decorative special figure start memory display displayed on the first memory display unit 83a corresponds to the first start memory in a one-to-one correspondence and is displayed side by side in the order of the memory, and here there are four first start memories It is shown that. The decorative special figure starting memory display at the left end is the decorative special figure starting memory display corresponding to the first starting memory stored first, and is shifted to the left each time it is digested. Further, it is possible to suggest the result of the special view 1 fluctuation display game corresponding to each start memory and the prefetching result such as the fluctuation pattern by the display mode.

  Further, the second storage display unit 83b displays the decoration special view start storage display corresponding to the second start storage in a one-on-one manner as the first storage display unit 83a. In FIG. 106 (a), the pre-reading effect of changing the display mode of the decoration special drawing start storage display is performed for the second start storage whose digest order is the third.

  On the left side of the first storage display unit 83a, an in-execution storage display unit 84 is provided that displays information related to starting storage corresponding to the currently executing special view variable display game. The special display start storage display at the left end of the first storage display unit 83a or the second storage display unit 83b is transferred to the in-execution storage display unit 84 at the start of the special view variation display game, and the special drawing is executed. The result of the variable display game, the fluctuation pattern and the like are suggested by the display mode.

  In the upper right portion of the display area, a starting memory number display unit 86 for displaying the starting memory number is provided. The starting memory number display unit 86 is provided with a first starting memory number displaying unit 86a for displaying the number of first starting memory and a second starting memory number displaying unit 86b for displaying the number of second starting memory. ing.

  When the second starting memory is digested and decreased from the state shown in FIG. 106 (a), the decorative special drawing start memory display at the left end of the second memory display unit 83b is the second memory display as shown in FIG. 106 (b). It pops out to the upper left of the part 83b, and as shown in FIG. 106 (c), it is displayed to flow into the in-execution storage display part 84. Further, as shown in FIGS. 106 (b) and 106 (c), in the starting memory number display unit 86, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 86b decreases and the display is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special drawing 2 variation display game based on the second start storage is started in the decorative special figure variation display game display unit 85. Also, in the second memory display unit 83b, as shown in FIG. 106 (d), the decoration special drawing start memory display pops out above the second memory display unit 83b, as shown in FIG. 106 (e). Display is performed to return to the second storage display unit 83b so as to shift to the position of.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 106 (f), the decoration special view start memory display of the second memory display unit 83b is shifted left one by one from the state of FIG. 106 (a) with the consumption of the second start memory. In addition to being in the state, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is reduced by one. The same decoration display is performed also in the case of the first start storage.

  FIG. 107 shows an example of decoration display (animation) when start memory is generated and increased. When the second start memory is generated from the state shown in FIG. 107 (a), it is located below the second memory display unit 83b as shown in FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c) and a new decoration special view start memory display The decoration special drawing start memory display appears from the lower side of the position where is displayed, and the display moving to the upper side is performed. Further, as shown in FIGS. 107 (b) and 107 (c), in the second starting memory number display unit 86b, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display unit 86b is increased and the display is displayed in an enlarged manner.

  As a result, as shown in FIG. 107 (d), with the increase of the second start storage, the decoration special view start storage display is increased by one on the second storage display unit 83b from the state of FIG. 107 (a). At the same time, the numerical value of the second starting memory number display portion 86b is increased by one. The same decoration display is performed also in the case of the first start storage.

  FIG. 108 shows an example of the execution mode of the decorative special view variable display game. From the state shown in FIG. 108 (a), the variation display is started as shown in FIG. 108 (b) with the decoration display as shown in FIG. After that, as shown in FIG. 108 (c), the identification information temporarily stops in the left change display area. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to shake, which indicates that the stop has not been completely stopped. Next, as shown in FIG. 108 (d), the identification information temporarily stops in the right change display area. Here, in the reach state where the same identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, reach effect is started. Of course, different identification information may be stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area and the reach state may not be reached.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 108 (e), the identification information temporarily stops in the middle variation display area, and the identification information temporarily stops in all the variation display areas. Note that the temporarily stopped state is equivalent to that during variable display, and here, it is still in the state of variable display. Thereafter, when a stop command is received from the game control apparatus 100, the identification information is stopped as shown in FIG. 108 (f), and the result mode is displayed. Furthermore, as shown in FIG. 108 (g), the display of the in-execution storage display portion 84 is erased with the end of the stop time set with the reception of the stop command, and the next decoration special view variation display game can be started. It becomes a state. In the state of FIG. 108 (g), if there is no start memory, it will be in the customer waiting state. If the result is a special result in the state of FIG. 108 (g), the special game state is entered.

  Next, an execution mode of the effect when the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command will be described. FIG. 109 shows an example in which there are a plurality of starting memories and the special figure variation display game is executed continuously.

  FIG. 109 (a) shows an execution mode when a stop command is successfully received. In this example, the first start memory number is three and the second start memory number is 0, and the special display 1 suspension display 54 and the display device 41 provided on the collective display device 50 are displayed. In the figure start memory display, the first sub display unit 93 displays that there are three first start memories.

  When the special view variation display game A is started based on the start storage from this state (t11), the special view display 51 which is a special view display provided on the batch display device 50 controlled by the game control device 100 The variable display is started. Further, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts one from the first start memory number with the start of the special view variation display game, and the special view 1 suspension display 54 provided in the collective display device 50 reduces the first start storage by two. Update the display to indicate that there are Further, the game control device 100 transmits, to the effect control device 300, a change command forming the start information and a decoration special drawing reserve number command. Besides this, a decoration special drawing command, a change command, and a stop information command are also transmitted.

  The effect control device 300 starts the decoration special figure variation display game based on the reception of these commands (t11). In the first decorative game displayed on the display device 41, the variable display of identification information is started in the left fluctuation display area, the middle fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area. After that, the identification information is temporarily stopped, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variable display areas as the time value A elapses (t12). Note that in the drawing, the dotted lines indicate the state in which the identification information temporarily stops in all the variable display areas. As the time value A, a time obtained by excluding the time (t12 to t13) to be in the temporary stop state from the information on the fluctuation time (t11 to t13) included in the fluctuation command is set at the start of the first decoration game. As a result, the identification information can be temporarily stopped in the first decoration game before the end of the fluctuation time. The information of the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation command is information of the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game and is also information of the fluctuation time of the decorative special figure fluctuation display game. It can also be said that it is the time from the start of fluctuation to the transmission of stop information.

  The effect control device 300 also starts variable display of the second decoration game displayed on the first sub game display unit 91 of the sub information display device 90. The variable display on the first sub game display unit 91 is performed by blinking an LED. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 updates the display indicating that there are two first start memories in the first storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a of the display device 41 and the first sub display unit 93. . In addition, the information regarding the starting memory which executed the special figure fluctuation display game A is displayed by the memory display unit 84 during execution (t11).

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display unit 51 (t13), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t13 ~ t14). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t13). In the effect control device 300, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are stopped with the reception of the stop command (t13), and the result mode is displayed (t13 to t14).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts a special figure variation display game B which is the next special figure variation display game based on the start memory (t14). As described above, when the special figure variation display game B is started, the variation indication is started on the special figure 1 display 51. Further, the game control device 100 subtracts the first start memory number by one with the start of the special view variation display game, and updates the special view 1 hold display 54 to a display indicating that there is one first start storage. Do. Further, the game control device 100 transmits, to the effect control device 300, a change command as the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command, and the like.

  The effect control device 300 starts variable display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game based on the reception of these commands (t14). For the first decoration game, from the information on the fluctuation time included in the fluctuation command, the time value B (t14 to t15) is the time until the identification information temporarily stops in all the fluctuation display areas when the first decoration game is started. It is set. Furthermore, the effect control device 300 updates the display indicating that there is one first start storage in the first storage display unit 83 a and the first start storage number display unit 86 a of the display device 41 and the first sub display unit 93. The information regarding the starting memory which executed the special figure fluctuation display game B is displayed on the during-execution memory display part 84 (t14).

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t16), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t16 to t17). ). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t16). In the effect control device 300, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are stopped with the reception of the stop command (t16), and the result mode is displayed (t16 to t17).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts a special figure fluctuation display game C which is the next special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory (t17). The special figure variation display game C and the first decoration game and the second decoration game corresponding to the special figure variation display game C are also executed in the same manner as described above.

  FIG. 109 (b) shows the case in which the effect control device 300 can not receive a stop command for the special view variation display game A and the special view variation display game B in the case of FIG. 109 (a). The special figure variation display game A is started (t31), and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all variation display areas in the first decoration game (t32) as in FIG. 109 (a).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t33), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t33 to t33) t34). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t33). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command is not received, the fluctuation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends (t33). In the first decoration game, the state in which the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed so as to shake is continued, and in the second decoration game, the blinking of the LED is continued.

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special figure variation display game B which is the next special figure variation display game based on the start memory, and starts the variation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t34 ). Further, in response to this, a variation command forming the start information, a decoration special drawing reservation number command, and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t34). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the special game change display game A which is the previous game, the following does not receive the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game. It is in the state where the start information of the special figure fluctuation display game B which is the game is received. Therefore, based on the reception of the change command, the change display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is stopped, and as a result of the special view change display game A, the result of the removal is displayed for a predetermined time (t34 to t35).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 updates the display of the special view 1 suspension display 54 controlled by the game control apparatus 100 along with the consumption of the start memory accompanying the start of the special view fluctuation display game B. On the other hand, during the predetermined time (t34 to t35) in which the effect control device 300 displays the result of the special view change display game A, the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300 or The first starting memory number display unit 86a is in a state of waiting for updating. Further, the display of the during-execution storage display portion 84 is also in a state in which the display corresponding to the special figure variation display game A is continued. However, the display of the starting memory number in the first sub-display unit 93 is updated with the start of the special figure variation display game B so as to correspond to the actual starting memory number (t34).

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game A ends, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game B (t35). In this case, the same time as in the case of FIG. 109 is set for the time value B calculated from the fluctuation time, and the time when the identification information temporarily stops in all the fluctuation display areas is displayed as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A Shorten by a predetermined amount of time. By doing this, it is possible to prevent the occurrence of inconvenience in the rendering of the special figure variation display game B.

  In addition, with the start of the decoration special view fluctuation display game corresponding to the special view fluctuation display game B (t35), the effect control device 300 causes the first storage display portion 83a of the display device 41 and the first start storage number display portion 86a. Update according to the actual value of. Further, the display of the during-execution storage display unit 84 is also a display corresponding to the special figure variation display game B. Here, the effects produced by the first storage display unit 83a, the first start storage number display unit 86a, and the in-execution storage display unit 84 of the display device 41 perform the same effects as the normal effects as shown in FIG. By doing this, it is possible to make it look as if the special figure variation display game has started from this point in time, and it is possible to make the rendering based on the drop of the stop command not uncomfortable.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game B ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t37), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t37- t38). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t37). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command as well. Since the effect control device 300 does not receive the stop command, the variation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is continued even if the variation time of the special view variation display game B ends (t37) as described above. .

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special figure fluctuation display game C which is the next special figure fluctuation display game based on the start memory, and starts the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t38 ). Further, in response to this, a change command forming the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t38). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the special figure change display game B which is the previous game, after receiving the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game, the following is performed. It is in the state where the start information of the special figure fluctuation display game C which is the game is received. Therefore, based on the reception of the change command, the result of the special view change display game B is displayed for a predetermined time in the first decoration game and the second decoration game (t38 to t39).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 updates the display of the special view 1 suspension display 54 controlled by the game control apparatus 100 along with the consumption of the start memory accompanying the start of the special view fluctuation display game C. On the other hand, during the predetermined time (t38 to t39) in which the effect control device 300 displays the result of the special figure change display game B, the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 controlled by the effect control device 300 or The first starting memory number display unit 86a is in a state of waiting for updating. In addition, the display of the during-execution storage display unit 84 is also in a state in which the display corresponding to the special figure variation display game B is continued. However, the display of the starting memory number in the first sub-display unit 93 is updated with the start of the special figure variation display game C so as to correspond to the actual starting memory number (t38).

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game B ends, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game C (t39). In this case, the same time as in the case of FIG. 109 is set for the time value C calculated from the fluctuation time, and the time when the identification information temporarily stops in all the fluctuation display areas is displayed as the result of the special figure fluctuation display game B Shorten by a predetermined amount of time.

  For the time when the identification information temporarily stops in all the variable display areas that will be set if there is no drop of the stop command (for example, t18 to t19 in FIG. 109 (a)), A time which is twice or more the predetermined time (t38 to t39) to be displayed is set. As a result, as shown in FIG. 109 (b), even if a drop of continuous stop command occurs in two special figure variation display games, it is possible not to affect the effect of the decorative special figure variation display game .

  Also, with the start of the decoration special view variation display game corresponding to the special view variation display game C (t39), the effect control device 300 causes the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 and the first start storage number display unit 86a. Update according to the actual value of. Further, the display of the during-execution storage display unit 84 is also a display corresponding to the special figure variation display game C. The effects produced by the first memory display unit 83a, the first start memory number display unit 86a and the in-execution memory display unit 84 of the display device 41 here are the same as the normal effects as shown in FIG. By doing this, it is possible to make it look as if the special figure variation display game has started from this point in time, and it is possible to make the rendering based on the drop of the stop command not uncomfortable.

  In addition, it is rare to miss the stop command continuously in two special figure variation display games, and the identification information is tentatively set in all the variation display areas to be set when the stop command is not missed. As for the stopping time, as a time longer than a predetermined time for displaying the result mode of the previous game, the effect of the decoration special view variation display game is not affected for the drop of one stop command. It is good. Of course, three or more times of the predetermined time for displaying the result mode may be set, and can be set arbitrarily.

  In addition, when the stop command is missed, the time for temporarily stopping the identification information in all the variable display areas is shortened, but other times may be shortened. For example, the fluctuation time may be shortened by cutting the effect for a predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation. In this case, no advance notice effect or the like on the special view fluctuation display game being executed is performed in a predetermined time or twice or more times the predetermined time from the start of the fluctuation, and even if the effect of this portion is cut It is preferable not to do so. In addition, it is possible not to perform the advance presentation effect or the like in this portion only when the effect is cut. Further, it is possible to provide a period in which there is no influence even if the effect is cut over a predetermined time or a time twice or more of the predetermined time in the middle of the variable display, and the effect of this period may be cut.

  In addition, an effect without a cut of the effect and an effect in which the effect of the predetermined time has been cut in advance are prepared, and if there is a drop in the stop command, the effect of the predetermined time is cut A presentation may be used.

  In addition, there is a drop in the stop command, and the period during which the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is displayed based on the next special figure fluctuation display game fluctuation command reception corresponds to the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game In the first storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a, it is determined that the effect associated with the decrease in the start storage is on standby, but if a new start storage occurs during this period, the first storage display unit 83a and the first storage display unit 83a The effect associated with the increase of the start memory is made executable by the one start memory number display 86a. However, if the display exceeds the upper limit number, it may be difficult to display, so the effect accompanying the increase is also on standby, and the period for displaying the result of the special view variable display game is ended and the next In response to the start of the special view variable display game, after the effect accompanied by the decrease of the start memory is performed by the first memory display unit 83a and the first start memory number display unit 86a, the effect accompanied by the increase is performed.

  For example, when the start memory number is 3 while the special figure variation display game is being executed, and the next special figure variation display game is started after dropping the stop command of the special figure variation display game, the previous special figure variation is performed. Although the actual number of start memories is two in the period in which the result of the display game is displayed, the number of start memories is three on the display because the reduction effect is on standby. If two new starting memories are generated during this period, it is impossible to execute the effect of the increase due to the occurrence of the second starting memory on the display. In this case, it is assumed that the number of start-up memories on the display is updated to 4 as the first start-up memory is generated in the period in which the result is displayed. Thereafter, after the period for displaying the result is ended and the effect of decreasing the starting memory is performed corresponding to the special figure variation display game being executed, and the number of starting memories on the display is made 3, the result is displayed An effect of increase corresponding to the starting memory generated in a period is performed.

  In addition, there is a drop in the stop command, and the period during which the result of the previous special figure fluctuation display game is displayed based on the next special figure fluctuation display game fluctuation command reception corresponds to the start of the next special figure fluctuation display game In the first storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a, the effect due to the reduction of the start storage is on standby, but the update of the start storage number in the first sub display unit 93 is also the first storage display unit As in the case of 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a, updating may be awaited, and may be updated at the same timing as the first storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a.

  FIG. 110 shows an example in the case where the result of the special view variation display game is a special result and the special game state is executed. FIG. 110 (a) shows an execution mode when a stop command is successfully received. The processes from the start of the special figure variation display game A to the reception of the stop command (t51 to t53) are the same as in the case of t11 to t13 in FIG. 109 (a).

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t53), and displays the special result as a result mode over a predetermined stop time (T53 to t54). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t53). In the effect control device 300, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are stopped with the reception of the stop command (t53), and the special result is displayed as the result mode (t53 to t54).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special game state (t54). The special view 1 display unit 51 maintains the state in which the special result is displayed. Further, with the start of the special game state, a fanfare command for forming special game state start information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t54). In the effect control device 300, in response to the reception of the fanfare command, the display of the result in the first decoration game is ended and the display of the in-execution storage display unit 84 is ended and the fanfare effect is started. In the second decoration game, the display of the special result is continued.

  Thereafter, when the fanfare period ends, the game control apparatus 100 starts a first round, and transmits a round command to the effect control apparatus 300 (t55). In the effect control device 300, with the reception of the round command, the fanfare effect is ended and the round effect is started.

  FIG. 110 (b) shows the case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the special view change display game A in the case of FIG. 110 (a). The special figure variation display game A is started (t61), and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas in the first decoration game (t62) as in FIG. 110 (a).

  When the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t63), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t63 to t64) . Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t63). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command is not received, the fluctuation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends (t63). In the first decoration game, the state in which the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed so as to shake is continued, and in the second decoration game, the blinking of the LED is continued. Further, the display of the during-execution storage display portion 84 is also in a state in which the display corresponding to the special figure variation display game A is continued.

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special game state (t64). Also, along with this, a fanfare command that makes up the special gaming state start information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t 64). In the effect control device 300, the special game is received without receiving the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the special figure change display game A which is the previous game. The fanfare command as the state start information is received. Therefore, the variable display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is stopped based on the reception of the fanfare command, and the special result is displayed for a predetermined time as a result of the special figure fluctuation display game A (t64 to t65).

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the special figure change display game A ends, the effect control device 300 starts fanfare effect (t65). In this case, since the time until the reception of the round command is shortened by the time when the result is displayed, part of the effect is cut so as to shorten the fanfare effect by this time. Although the part which cuts fanfare production can be set up arbitrarily, it is preferable to cut the part which a contradiction etc. do not produce in production. In addition, a fanfare effect without a cut of the effect and a fanfare effect whose effect for a predetermined time has been cut in advance are prepared, and if there is a drop in the stop command, the effect for the predetermined time is cut It is also possible to use the fanfare effect that has been set.

  It should be noted that during the time (t64 to t66) from when the game control apparatus 100 transmits the fanfare command making the special game state start information to when the special variation winning device 38 is opened (t64 to t66), the effect control apparatus 300 misses the stop command. Is longer than the display time (t64 to t65) of the result set to. As a result, it is possible to reliably execute a round effect in which the special variation winning device 38 is opened, thereby preventing the player from being disadvantaged.

  FIG. 111 shows an example in which the result of the special view variable display game ends with the result of the release, and there is no start memory and the customer is in the waiting state. FIG. 111 (a) shows an execution mode when the stop command is successfully received. The processes from the start of the special figure fluctuation display game A to the reception of the stop command (t71 to t73) are the same as in the case of t11 to t13 in FIG. 109 (a).

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t73), and displays the special result as a result mode over a predetermined stop time (T73 to t74). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t73). In the effect control device 300, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are stopped in response to the reception of the stop command (t73), and the special result is displayed as a result mode (t73 to t74).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the customer waiting state (t74). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 maintains the state which displayed the detachment result. Also, with the start of the customer waiting state, a customer waiting demo command that makes standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t 74). In response to the reception of the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 starts the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, the state which displayed the result in the 1st decoration game is maintained for a fixed time from the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display of a moving image effect etc. will be performed when this fixed time passes. The display of the in-execution storage display portion 84 ends with the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect (t74). In addition, with regard to the second decoration game, even if the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the display of the out result is continued.

  In addition, with the period which starts the customer waiting demonstration effect with the reception of the customer waiting demonstration command and maintains the state where the result is displayed in the said customer waiting demonstration effect, it becomes the display of the result in the 1st decoration game, and the separate stop display time It is possible not to provide

  FIG. 111 (b) shows the case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the special figure change display game A in the case of FIG. 111 (a). The special figure variation display game A is started (t81), and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas in the first decoration game (t82) as in FIG. 111 (a).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t83), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t83 to t83). t84). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t83). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command is not received, the fluctuation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends (t83). In the first decoration game, the state in which the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed so as to shake is continued, and in the second decoration game, the blinking of the LED is continued. Further, the display of the during-execution storage display portion 84 is also in a state in which the display corresponding to the special figure variation display game A is continued.

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the customer waiting state (t84). Also, along with this, a customer waiting demo command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t84). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the special view change display game A which is the previous game, the wait information does not receive the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game. The customer waiting demo command is received. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo command, the variation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is stopped, and the result of outliers is displayed for a predetermined time as a result of the special view fluctuation display game A (t84 to t85) .

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game A ends, the effect control device 300 starts the customer waiting demonstration effect (t85). In this case, although the start of the waiting for customer demonstration effect is delayed by the time when the result is displayed, the effect is not cut as it merely delays the start of the effect. Of course, the effect may be changed in the same manner as in FIGS. 109 (b) and 110 (b), for example, by cutting the predetermined portion of the customer waiting demonstration effect for the time when the result is displayed.

  In the examples of FIGS. 109 (b), 110 (b) and 111 (b), the result is temporarily stopped in the first decoration game, and the player can recognize the result. Even if a change command, a fanfare command, or a customer waiting demo command is received after dropping the stop command, the effect corresponding to the command is started without providing a time for stopping and displaying the result of the previous game. Also good. On the other hand, in the second decoration game, when a change command, a fanfare command, or a customer waiting demo command is received after dropping the stop command, the result is displayed for a predetermined time after the reception of these commands. Also good. Of course, contrary to this, in the first decoration game, the result of the previous game is displayed for a predetermined time after the reception of these commands, and in the second decoration game, the time to stop and display the result of the previous game is not provided. The effect corresponding to the command may be started. That is, in at least one of the decorative games, it is sufficient to display the result of the previous game for a predetermined time after the reception of these commands.

  In the case where there is a notification to be started based on the reception of the stop command and the stop command is missed, the notification may be started triggered by the command received thereafter. For example, when the firing direction (right or left) of the game ball changes due to the change of the game state, such as the start or end of the time saving state or the start or end of the special game state, the special figure just before the change Notification is issued to indicate the launch direction based on the reception of the stop command of the variable display game. In this case, in the case where the stop command is missed, notification may be started to indicate the firing direction when the subsequent change command, fanfare command, or customer waiting demo command is received.

  Also, in the case of dropping the stop command and displaying the result of the previous special feature variation display game based on the reception of the subsequent command, the effect of displaying the result is performed by the effect corresponding to the previous special feature variation display game After that, it is said that the special game variation display game later, the special game state effect, and the customer waiting demonstration effect are started, but if the result of the previous game is displayed, the effect is whatever good. For example, the result of the previous game may be displayed in an effect mode that is not normally executed to recognize that there is an abnormality. In addition, although the result of stopping and displaying the identification information is displayed, other effects such as background, voice, and movement of character are displayed as effects of the special view variation display game or special gaming state later, customer waiting demonstration effects Also good. In this way, it is not necessary to cut the effect.

  Next, an execution mode in the case of recovery from a power failure that occurred during the execution of the special view variation display game will be described. FIG. 112 (a) shows an execution mode when the stop command is successfully received. In this example, the special view variation display game is started based on the start storage (t101), and the special view 1 display 51 starts the variation display. In addition, the game control device 100 transmits, to the effect control device 300, a change command forming the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command, and the like. The effect control device 300 starts variable display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game based on the reception of these commands (t101).

  Then, the power is shut off during the special view variation display game (t102), and then the power is restored (t103). When the power is shut off, the game control apparatus 100 interrupts the running special feature variation display game and performs processing when a power failure occurs (t102). Even when the power is shut off, the game control apparatus 100 holds the stored information by the supply of power from the backup power supply unit 420, and resumes control based on the held information when power is restored. By resuming this control, the special figure fluctuation display game interrupted by the interruption of the power is resumed (t103).

  Further, when the control is resumed, a command necessary for restarting the game is transmitted to the effect control device 300. Here, since the special view fluctuation display game interrupted by the power-off is resumed along with the restart of control, the recovery screen command forming the recovery information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t103). Further, in this case, information on the result of the to-be-changed special-pattern variation display game to be resumed is also transmitted. Here, information is sent indicating that the result is out.

  The effect control device 300 displays the power failure recovery screen on the display device 41 in response to the reception of the recovery screen command. Since the effect control device 300 is not provided with the backup means, the information in the RAM is lost due to the interruption of the power source, and the decorative special figure fluctuation display game or effect corresponding to the resumed special drawing fluctuation display game can be resumed. Can not. Therefore, the power failure recovery screen is displayed on the display device 41 without displaying the first decoration game. In addition, with regard to the second decoration game, it is assumed that the result mode of the disconnection from the reception of the recovery screen command is displayed.

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t104), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t104 to t105). ). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t104). In the effect control device 300, in response to the reception of the stop command, the display device 41 ends the display of the power failure recovery screen and displays the result of the deviation in the first decoration game (t104 to t105). In the second decoration game, the result mode of the detachment is kept displayed.

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the next special view variation display game based on the start storage (t105), and starts the variation display on the special view 1 display 51. In addition, it transmits, to the effect control device 300, a change command forming the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command, and the like. The effect control device 300 starts variable display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game based on the reception of these commands (t105).

  FIG. 112 (b) shows the case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the resumed special view variation display game in the case of FIG. 112 (a). The special figure variation display game is started (t121), the power is shut off (t122), and the power is restored (t123) as in FIG. 112 (a).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t124), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t124 to t125 ). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t124). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command has not been received, the display of the power failure recovery screen is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game ends (t124). Then, when the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the next special view variation display game based on the start storage, and starts the variation display on the special view 1 display 51 (t126). In addition, in response to this, the variation control which makes start information, the decoration special drawing reservation number command and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t126). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the recovery screen command that is recovery information indicating that the interrupted special view variation display game has been resumed, the variation command that is start information without receiving the stop command that is stop information Will be received. Therefore, based on the reception of the change command, the display device 41 ends the display of the power failure recovery screen and displays the result of the deviation in the first decoration game (t125 to t126). In the second decoration game, the result mode of the detachment is kept displayed.

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the resumed special figure variation display game is ended, the effect control device 300 starts the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game in execution (t126). Also in this case, similarly to the above, the time when the identification information temporarily stops in all the variable display areas provided at the end of the decorative special game variable display game is shortened by the predetermined time when the result is displayed and the special figure fluctuation In order to prevent the inconvenience of the presentation of the display game.

  FIG. 113 shows an example of the case where the special game state is executed as a result of the resumed special figure variation display game becomes a special result. FIG. 113 (a) shows an execution mode when a stop command is successfully received. From the start of the special view variable display game to the reception of the stop command (t151 to t154) are the same as in the case of t101 to t104 in FIG. 112 (a).

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t 154), and displays the special result as a result mode over a predetermined stop time ((154) t154 to t155). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t154). In the effect control device 300, in response to the reception of the stop command, the display device 41 ends the display of the power failure recovery screen and displays the special result in the first decoration game (t154 to t155). In addition, in the second decoration game, the display of the result mode of the detachment is changed to the display of the special result (t154).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special game state (t155). The special view 1 display unit 51 maintains the state in which the special result is displayed. Further, with the start of the special game state, a fanfare command for forming special game state start information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t155). In response to the reception of the fanfare command, the effect control device 300 ends the display of the result in the first decoration game and starts fanfare production. In the second decoration game, the display of the special result is continued. Thereafter, when the fanfare period ends, the game control device 100 starts a first round, and transmits a round command to the effect control device 300 (t156). In the effect control device 300, with the reception of the round command, the fanfare effect is ended and the round effect is started.

  FIG. 113 (b) shows a case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the special view variable display game resumed in the case of FIG. 113 (a). The special figure variation display game is started (t161), and the process until the power is restored (t163) is the same as FIG. 113 (a). After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t 164), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t 164 to t 165). ). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t164). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command is not received, the display of the power failure recovery screen is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special view fluctuation display game ends (t164). Then, when the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special game state (t165). Further, along with this, a fanfare command for forming special game state start information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t165). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the recovery screen command that is recovery information, the effect control device 300 does not receive the stop command that is the stop information, and receives the fanfare command that is the special gaming state start information. Therefore, based on the reception of the fanfare command, the display device 41 ends the display of the power failure recovery screen and displays the special result in the first decoration game (t165 to t166). In addition, in the second decoration game, the display of the result mode of the detachment is changed to the display of the special result (t165).

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the resumed special figure variation display game ends, the effect control device 300 starts the fanfare effect (t166). Also in this case, as described above, the time until reception of the round command is shortened by the time when the result is displayed, so the fanfare effect is shortened by this time.

  FIG. 114 shows an example in the case where the result of the restarted special view variation display game is ended with the result of absence, and there is no start memory and it is in the customer waiting state. FIG. 114 (a) shows an execution mode when the stop command is successfully received. From the start of the special figure variation display game to the reception of the stop command (t171 to t174) are the same as in the case of t101 to t104 in FIG. 112 (a).

  Then, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t 174), and displays the special result as a result mode over a predetermined stop time. (T174 to t175). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t174). In the effect control device 300, in response to the reception of the stop command, the display device 41 ends the display of the power failure recovery screen and displays the deviation result in the first decoration game (t174 to t175). In the second decoration game, the display of the result mode of the detachment is maintained (t174).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the customer waiting state (t175). In addition, the special figure 1 display 51 maintains the state which displayed the detachment result. Further, with the start of the customer waiting state, a customer waiting demo command that makes standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t175). In response to the reception of the customer waiting demo command, the effect control device 300 starts the customer waiting demonstration effect. In addition, the state which displayed the result in the 1st decoration game is maintained for a fixed time from the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect, and the display of a moving image effect etc. will be performed when this fixed time passes. In addition, with regard to the second decoration game, even if the customer waiting demonstration effect is started, the display of the out result is continued.

  FIG. 114 (b) shows a case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the special view variable display game resumed in the case of FIG. 114 (a). The special figure variation display game is started (t181), and until the power is restored (t183) is the same as FIG. 114 (a). After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t184), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t184 to t185 ). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t184). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command has not been received, the display of the power failure recovery screen is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends (t184). Then, when the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the customer waiting state (t185). Further, in response to this, a customer waiting demo command forming standby information is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t185). After the effect control device 300 receives the recovery screen command which is the recovery information, the effect control device 300 does not receive the stop command which is the stop information, but receives the customer waiting demo command which is the standby information. Therefore, based on the reception of the customer waiting demo command, the display device 41 ends the display of the power failure recovery screen and displays the deviation result in the first decoration game (t185 to t186). In the second decoration game, the display of the result mode of the detachment is maintained (t185).

  Then, when the time for displaying the result of the resumed special map variation display game ends, the effect control device 300 starts the customer waiting demonstration effect (t186). Also in this case, the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect is delayed by the time when the result is displayed as described above, but the effect is not cut as it is merely to delay the start of the effect. Of course, the effect may be changed in the same manner as in FIGS. 109 (b) and 110 (b), for example, by cutting the predetermined portion of the customer waiting demonstration effect for the time when the result is displayed.

  In the above description, the information on the result of the special view fluctuation display game to be resumed at the time of the power failure recovery is transmitted, but the information on the result may not be transmitted. In this case, regardless of presence / absence of reception of the stop command, the power failure recovery screen is displayed until reception of a variation command forming start information, a customer waiting demo command forming standby information, or a fanfare command forming special game state start information. Then, when a change command or a customer waiting demo command is received, a result is displayed for a predetermined time after reception of the command, and when a fanfare command is received, a special result is received for a predetermined time from reception of the command. It may be displayed.

  In the above description, the special figure variation display game executed by the game control device 100 and the decorative special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game executed by the presentation control device 300 have been described. The same control may be performed in the display game. In this case, the game control device 100 transmits a command similar to that of the special view variation display game to the effect control device 300, and based on the reception of the command, the effect control device 300 displays the decoration similar to the special view variation display game. The figure variation display game is to be executed. Then, when the stop command associated with the stop of the common drawing variation display game is missed, the same process as described above is performed.

  In addition, when displaying the result corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game which missed the stop command based on the reception of the next command (t34 to t35 and t38 to t39 in FIG. 109 (b), t64 to FIG. 110 (b) The stop command is dropped at t65, t84 to t85 in FIG. 111 (b), t125 to t126 in FIG. 112 (b), t165 to t166 in FIG. 113 (b), and 185 to t186 in FIG. 114 (b). A symbol corresponding to the information of the result included in the information received corresponding to the figure variation display game may be displayed. In this case, the stop symbol scheduled to be displayed based on the reception of the stop command will be displayed.

  The information of the result included in the information received corresponding to the special figure variation display game which missed the stop command is the information of the result included in the decoration special figure command, the variation command, etc. received at the start of the special figure variation display game But it is good. In addition, when the special figure fluctuation display game is resumed at the time of power failure recovery, the information on the result transmitted at the time of power failure recovery may be used. Also, in the case of t64 to t65 in FIG. 110 (b) and t165 to t166 in FIG. 113, the information of the result included in the fanfare command may be used. In addition, it may be the information of the result included in the prefetch command transmitted at the time of the occurrence of the start memory which executes the special figure fluctuation display game which missed the stop command.

  In addition, a stop symbol may be prepared in advance for display when the stop command is missed, and the prepared stop symbol may be displayed. In this case, at least two types of removal results and special results are prepared, and either is displayed according to the situation. In addition, when there are multiple types as a special result of the decoration game and it shows that the value (such as whether or not it is strange or the number of rounds) given to the player is different depending on the type, it is displayed when the stop command is missed. As a special symbol to be prepared in advance, a special symbol indicating that the value given to the player is the lowest among a plurality of types of special symbols may be used. In addition, the out pattern or the special symbol prepared in advance for display when the stop command is dropped may be a stop symbol not displayed in a normal game.

  In addition, although the result corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game which missed the stop command is displayed in the decoration game for a predetermined time from the reception of the next command, the decoration game is performed for the predetermined time in response to the reception of the next command. It suffices to display it in the form of, and does not necessarily have to be displayed immediately after receipt of the next command. For example, the display of the result may be started after a predetermined time from the reception of the next command.

  From the above, the special game state advantageous to the player is executed when the game (special figure variation display game, common drawing variation display game) is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result. Game control means (game control apparatus 100) for controlling the game and information based on the information from the game control means, the effect for displaying the decoration game (the decoration special figure variation display game) corresponding to the game The game control means is configured to transmit start information to the effect control means at the start of the game and to transmit stop information to the effect control means at the time of deriving the result of the game. The effect control means is configured to start the decoration game based on the reception of the start information, and to display stop the result in the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information, the start corresponding to the previous game When the start information of the next game following the previous game is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game after receiving the information, it corresponds to the reception of the start information of the next game In the decoration game, the result of the decoration game corresponding to the result of the previous game is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time. Therefore, even when the stop information is missed, the decoration game can be appropriately controlled, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  Further, the game control means is configured to transmit the standby information to the effect control means when the game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, and the effect control means is adapted to start the game corresponding to the previous game. When the standby information is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game after receiving the information, the result of the previous game is stopped and displayed in the decoration game for a predetermined time after the reception of the standby information. It will be done.

  In addition, the game control means is configured to transmit the special game state start information to the effect control means at the start of the special game state, and the effect control means receives the start information corresponding to the previous game, and then the destination When the special gaming state start information is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the first game, the display of the result of the previous game is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time from the reception of the special gaming state start information. It will be done.

  Game control means for controlling a game in a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of the start condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result; The game control means (effect control device 300) for displaying the first decoration game and the second decoration game corresponding to the game based on the information from the game control means (game control device 100); The start information is transmitted to the effect control means at the start of the game, and the stop information is transmitted to the effect control means at the time of deriving the result of the game, and the effect control means is configured to receive the first decoration game based on the reception of the start information. The second decoration game is started, and the result is stopped and displayed in the first decoration game and the second decoration game based on the reception of the stop information, and the start information corresponding to the previous game is received, When the start information of the next game following the previous game is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game later, the predetermined time corresponding to the reception of the start information of the next game The result of the decoration game corresponding to the result of the previous game is stopped and displayed in at least one of the decoration games. Therefore, even when the stop information is missed, the decoration game can be appropriately controlled, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  Further, the game control means is configured to transmit the standby information to the effect control means when the game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, and the effect control means is adapted to start the game corresponding to the previous game. If the standby information is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game after receiving the information, the result of the previous game is stopped in the at least one decoration game for a predetermined time from the reception of the standby information. It will be displayed.

  The game control means is configured to transmit the special game state start information to the effect control means at the start of the special game state, and the effect control means receives the start information corresponding to the first game, and then the game of the second game is received. If the special game state start information is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the first game result in the at least one decoration game is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time from the reception of the special game state start information It will be done.

  In addition, the game control means (game control means for controlling the game in the game machine which generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result. Control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a decoration game which variably displays identification information corresponding to a game based on information from the game control means, the game control means comprising The start information is transmitted to the effect control means at the start of the game, and the stop information is transmitted to the effect control means at the time of deriving the game result, and the effect control means starts the decoration game based on the reception of the start information, It is configured to stop and display the result in the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information, and the start information includes information on the change time of the decoration game, and the change is based on the start information Is configured to set the execution mode of the decoration game so that the identification information is temporarily stopped before the end of the interval, and corresponds to the previous game after the start information corresponding to the earlier game is received. When the start information of the next game following the previous game is received without receiving the stop information, the decoration game is performed for a predetermined time corresponding to the reception of the start information of the next game. The result of the decoration game corresponding to the result is stopped and displayed, and the time of the temporarily stopped state in the decoration game corresponding to the next game is reduced according to the predetermined time for the stop display. Therefore, even when the stop information is missed, the decoration game can be appropriately controlled, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  Further, the effect control means is configured such that the difference between the variation time of the game and the time from the start of the decoration game corresponding to the game to the state in which the identification information is temporarily stopped in one game is a predetermined time The execution mode is set so as to be twice or more the time.

  In addition, it is controlled by the game control means, it is provided with the special fluctuation winning device 38 which can be opened in the special game state, the time from the game control means transmitting the special game state start information to opening the special fluctuation winning device 38 is , Will be longer than a predetermined time.

  In addition, the game control means (game control means for controlling the game in the game machine which generates a special game state advantageous to the player when the game is executed based on the establishment of the start condition and the result of the game is a special result. Control device 100) and effect control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a decoration game corresponding to the game based on the information from the game control means, and the game control means stores even in the power-off state A backup storage unit capable of holding data is provided, and start information is transmitted to the effect control unit at the start of the game, and stop information is transmitted to the effect control unit at the time of deriving the game result. The control can be resumed based on the data held by the game, and when the control is resumed, the game is interrupted when the interrupted game is resumed. The recovery information is transmitted to the control means, and the effect control means is configured to start the decoration game based on the reception of the start information, stop display of the result in the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information, and receive the recovery information Later, when the start information is received without receiving the stop information, the result of the deviation is stopped and displayed in the decoration game for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the start information. Therefore, even when the stop information is missed, the decoration game can be appropriately controlled, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  Further, the game control means is configured to transmit the standby information to the effect control means when the game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied, and after receiving the recovery information, the stop information is received. If the standby information is received without, the result of the deviation is stopped and displayed in the decoration game for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the standby information.

  Further, the game control means is configured to transmit the special game state start information to the effect control means at the start of the special game state, and the effect control means does not receive the stop information after receiving the recovery information. When the special game state start information is received, the special result is stopped and displayed in the decoration game for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the special game state start information.

  In addition, the game is executed based on the detection of the game ball in the start area, and the game is controlled in the game machine that generates the special game state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. The game control means includes a control means (game control device 100), and an effect control means (effect control device 300) for displaying a decoration game corresponding to the game based on the information from the game control means, and the game control means Start storage means (game control device 100) for storing start storage, which becomes the right to execute a game, to a predetermined upper limit number based on detection of gaming balls at the start winning opening 36 and the normal variation winning device 37) Based on the game execution means (game control apparatus 100) for executing the game, transmitting start information to the effect control means at the start of the game, and controlling the stop information when the game results are derived The presentation control means is provided with start storage display control means (effect control apparatus 300) for controlling the start storage display for displaying information on the start storage stored in the start storage means. The decoration game is started based on the reception, and the result is displayed and stopped in the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information, and the start information corresponding to the previous game is received after the start information corresponding to the previous game is received. When the start information of the next game following the previous game is received without reception, the decoration game is handled for the predetermined time in response to the reception of the start information of the next game. Stop displaying the result of the decoration game, and the start memory display control means compares the result of the previous game with the decoration game for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the start information of the next game. When the decoration game results are displayed stopped, so that the updating of the start memory display corresponding to the start of the next game was performed after the lapse of the predetermined time. Therefore, even when the stop information is missed, the decoration game can be appropriately controlled, and a decrease in the interest of the game can be prevented.

  In addition, the effect control means includes an in-execution storage display control means (effect control device 300) for controlling the in-execution storage display for displaying information on starting storage corresponding to the game being executed, and the in-execution storage display control means If the result of the decoration game corresponding to the result of the previous game is stopped and displayed for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the start information of the next game, the corresponding game is being executed. The stored display is displayed until the lapse of the predetermined time.

First Modification
Next, a first modified example of the gaming machine of the first embodiment described above will be described. In addition, basically, it has the same configuration as the gaming machine of the above-described first embodiment, and hereinafter, the same reference numeral is given to the part having the same configuration, and the description is mainly omitted. I will explain the part. The gaming machine of this modification also has a display mode similar to that of the first decoration game for the second decoration game.

  FIGS. 115 and 116 show an example of display on the display device 41 in the gaming machine of the present modification. In the present modification, a second decoration game display unit 88 for displaying a second decoration game of the decoration special figure variation display game is provided at the upper left portion of the display area. The second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88 is similar to the first decoration game displayed on the decoration special feature variation display game display unit 85, and each area of the left area, the middle area, and the right area After the identification information is changed and displayed, the display is stopped and the result is displayed.

  The sub information display apparatus 90 may or may not be provided. When the sub information display device 90 is provided, the periods of the variable display and the stop display for the display of the first sub game display unit 91 and the second sub game display unit 92 are the variable display on the second decoration game display unit 88. And the same as the period of stop indication.

  Further, the identification information used in the second decoration game display unit 88 is the same identification information as the identification information used in the first decoration game. Of course, completely different identification information may be used, or only a part (for example, a numeral part) of the identification information used in the first decoration game may be used in the second decoration game.

  FIG. 115 shows the execution mode of the decorative feature variation display game when the reach state is not reached. From the state shown in FIG. 115 (a), the variation display is started as shown in FIG. 115 (b) with the decoration display as shown in FIG. In the first decoration game in the decoration special figure fluctuation display game display unit 85, the fluctuation display of identification information is started in each fluctuation display area of the left fluctuation display area, the middle fluctuation display area, and the right fluctuation display area. Further, in the second decoration game in the second decoration game display unit 88, variable display of identification information is started in each of the left area, the middle area, and the right area. That is, in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized.

  Thereafter, first, as shown in FIG. 115 (c), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the left change display area of the first decoration game. In the temporary stop state, the identification information is displayed so as to shake, which indicates that the stop has not been completely stopped. At this time, in the second decoration game, the variable display continues in all the areas. That is, in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are asynchronous.

  Next, as shown in FIG. 115 (d), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the right change display area of the first decoration game. Here, different identification information is stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and is not in the reach state. Also in this case, the variation display continues in all areas in the second decoration game. That is, even in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are asynchronous.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 115 (e), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the middle variation display area of the first decoration game, and in the first decoration game, the identification information is temporarily stopped in all variation display areas. Note that the temporarily stopped state is equivalent to that during variable display, and here, it is still in the state of variable display. Also in this case, the variation display continues in all areas in the second decoration game. That is, even in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are asynchronous.

  Thereafter, when the stop command from the game control device 100 is received, as shown in FIG. 115 (f), the identification information is stopped in the first decoration game, and the result mode is displayed. At this time, in the second decoration game, the variable display is stopped in all the areas, and the same result mode as the first decoration game is displayed. That is, in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized. Further, with the end of the stop time, as shown in FIG. 115 (g), the display of the in-execution storage display portion 84 is erased, and the next decoration special figure variation display game can be started.

  In FIG. 116, the execution aspect of the decoration special figure variation display game in the case of being in the reach state is shown. FIGS. 116 (a) through 116 (c) are the same as FIGS. 115 (a) through 115 (c). Here, as shown in FIG. 116 (d), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the right fluctuation display area of the first decoration game, and the same identification information is stopped in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area to reach a reach state There is. At this time, in the second decoration game, the left area and the right area are temporarily stopped at the same identification information as the first decoration game. That is, in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized.

  Then, as shown in FIG. 116 (e), the identification information is temporarily stopped in the middle variation display area of the first decoration game, and in the first decoration game, the identification information is temporarily stopped in all variation display areas. At this time, in the second decoration game, the middle area is temporarily stopped at the same identification information as the first decoration game. That is, in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized.

  Thereafter, when the stop command from the game control device 100 is received, as shown in FIG. 116 (f), the identification information is stopped in the first decoration game, and the result mode is displayed. At this time, the variable display is stopped in all areas even in the second decoration game. That is, even in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized. Further, with the end of the stop time, as shown in FIG. 116 (g), the display of the in-execution storage display portion 84 is erased, and the next decoration special figure variation display game can be started.

  That is, in the case where the reach state shown in FIG. 115 is not reached, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are performed in the period from when the left fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped in the first decoration game until the fluctuation display ends and the stop display is performed. The decoration game becomes asynchronous. On the other hand, in the reach state shown in FIG. 116, the first decoration game is performed only when the left fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped in the first decoration game and the right fluctuation display area is temporarily stopped. And the second decoration game will be asynchronous. In particular, by being in the synchronized state after reaching the reach state, the reach state or reach in the second decoration game is achieved even if the first decoration game is not displayed by the display of the reach effect. Identification information can be confirmed.

  Next, an execution mode of the effect when the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command will be described. FIG. 117 shows an example in which there are a plurality of starting memories and the special view variation display game is executed continuously and the reach state is not reached. FIG. 117 (a) shows an execution mode when a stop command is successfully received. In this example, the first start storage number is three and the second start storage number is 0, and the special display 1 suspension display 54 and the first display 41 provided in the collective display unit 50 are provided. The storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a indicate that there are three first start storages.

  When the special view variation display game A is started based on the start storage from this state (t201), the special view 1 display 51 starts the variation display. Further, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts one from the first start memory number with the start of the special view variation display game, and the special view 1 suspension display 54 provided in the collective display device 50 reduces the first start storage by two. Update the display to indicate that there are Further, the game control device 100 transmits, to the effect control device 300, a change command as the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command, and the like.

  The effect control device 300 starts the decoration special figure variation display game based on the reception of these commands (t201). In the first decoration game displayed on the special figure variation display game display unit 85, variation display of identification information is started in the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area. Further, in the second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88, the variable display of identification information is started in the left area, the middle area, and the right area (see FIG. 115 (b)). Further, the effect control device 300 updates the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 and the first startup storage number display unit 86a to a display indicating that there are two first startup storages, and the ongoing storage display unit 84. The information regarding the starting memory which executed the special figure fluctuation display game A is displayed at step t201.

  Thereafter, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the left change display area of the first decoration game (t202). At this time, in the second decoration game, the variable display continues in all the areas. That is, from here, the first decoration game and the second decoration game become asynchronous (see FIG. 115 (c)). Next, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the right change display area of the first decoration game (t203). Here, different identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area and is not in the reach state. In this case, in the second decoration game, the variation display continues in all areas. That is, the first decoration game and the second decoration game remain asynchronous (see FIG. 115 (d)).

  Then, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the middle variation display area of the first decoration game, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas in the first decoration game (t204). Also in this case, the variation display continues in all areas in the second decoration game. That is, even in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are asynchronous (see FIG. 115 (e)).

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t205), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t205- t206). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t205). In the effect control device 300, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are stopped in response to the reception of the stop command (t205), and the result mode is displayed (t205 to t206). That is, from here, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized (see FIG. 115 (f)).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts a special figure variation display game B which is the next special figure variation display game based on the start memory (t206). Further, the effect control device 300 erases the display of the in-execution storage display unit 84 (see FIG. 115 (g)) with the end of the stop time, and starts the next decoration special figure variation display game. Further, the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 and the first start storage number display unit 86a update the display to show that there is one first start storage, and the special display variation display game by the running storage display unit 84. The information regarding the starting memory which performed B is displayed (t206).

  FIG. 117 (b) shows the case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the special figure variation display game A in the case of FIG. 117 (a). Until the special figure variation display game A is started (t211) and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas in the first decoration game (t214), it is the same as t201 to t204 in FIG. 117 (a).

  Thereafter, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t215), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t215 to t216). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t215). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command is not received, the fluctuation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends (t215). In the first decoration game, the state in which the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed so as to shake is continued, and in the second decoration game, the state in which variable display is performed in all the areas is continued (see FIG. 115 (e)).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special figure variation display game B which is the next special figure variation display game based on the start memory, and starts the variation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t216 ). In addition, in response to this, the variation control which makes start information, the decoration special figure reservation number command and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t216). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the special game change display game A which is the previous game, the following does not receive the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game. It is in the state where the start information of the special figure fluctuation display game B which is the game is received.

  Based on the reception of the change command, the temporarily stopped state of the first decoration game is ended, and the change display of the decoration special figure change display game corresponding to the special figure change display game B is started (t216). In addition, for the second decoration game, the variable display is stopped, and as a result of the special figure change display game A, the result of the removal is displayed for a predetermined time (t216 to t217). Also in this case, a symbol corresponding to the information of the result included in the received information may be displayed corresponding to the special view variable display game A, or a stop prepared in advance for display when the stop command is missed The symbol may be displayed. In the second decoration game, when the time for displaying the result of the special figure variation display game A ends, the special figure variation display game corresponding to the special figure variation display game B is started (t217).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 updates the display of the special view 1 suspension display 54 controlled by the game control apparatus 100 along with the consumption of the start memory accompanying the start of the special view fluctuation display game B. The displays of the first storage display unit 83a, the first starting storage number display unit 86a, and the storage display unit during execution 84 controlled by the effect control device 300 are updated according to the first decoration game. Here, when the variable display of the decoration special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game B is started, the updating is performed (t216).

  FIG. 118 shows a case where a plurality of starting memories exist and the special view variation display game is executed continuously, and an example in which the game machine is in the reach state is shown. FIG. 118 (a) shows an execution mode when the stop command is successfully received. In this example, the first start storage number is three and the second start storage number is 0, and the special display 1 suspension display 54 and the first display 41 provided in the collective display unit 50 are provided. The storage display unit 83a and the first start storage number display unit 86a indicate that there are three first start storages.

  When the special figure variation display game A is started based on the start storage from this state (t221), the variation indication is started on the special figure 1 display 51. Further, the game control apparatus 100 subtracts one from the first start memory number with the start of the special view variation display game, and the special view 1 suspension display 54 provided in the collective display device 50 reduces the first start storage by two. Update the display to indicate that there are Further, the game control device 100 transmits, to the effect control device 300, a change command as the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command, and the like.

  The effect control device 300 starts the decoration special figure variation display game based on the reception of these commands (t221). In the first decoration game displayed on the special figure variation display game display unit 85, variation display of identification information is started in the left variation display area, the middle variation display area, and the right variation display area. Further, in the second decoration game displayed on the second decoration game display unit 88, variable display of identification information is started in the left area, the middle area, and the right area (see FIG. 116 (b)). Further, the effect control device 300 updates the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 and the first startup storage number display unit 86a to a display indicating that there are two first startup storages, and the ongoing storage display unit 84. The information regarding the starting memory which executed the special figure fluctuation display game A is displayed by (t221).

  Thereafter, the identification information temporarily stops in the left change display area of the first decoration game (t222). At this time, in the second decoration game, the variable display continues in all the areas. That is, from here, the first decoration game and the second decoration game become asynchronous (see FIG. 116 (c)). Next, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the right change display area of the first decoration game (t223). Here, different identification information stops in the left fluctuation display area and the right fluctuation display area, and is in the reach state. In this case, in the second decoration game, the left area and the right area are temporarily stopped at the same identification information as the first decoration game. That is, from here, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized (see FIG. 116 (d)).

  Then, the identification information is temporarily stopped in the middle variation display area of the first decoration game, and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas in the first decoration game (t224). At this time, in the second decoration game, the middle area is temporarily stopped at the same identification information as the first decoration game. That is, even in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are in synchronization (see FIG. 116 (e)).

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control device 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t225), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t225 to 500). t226). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t225). In the effect control device 300, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are stopped with the reception of the stop command (t225), and the result mode is displayed (t225 to t226). That is, even in this state, the first decoration game and the second decoration game are in synchronization (see FIG. 116 (f)).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts a special figure variation display game B which is the next special figure variation display game based on the start memory (t226). Further, the effect control device 300 erases the display of the in-execution storage display unit 84 (see FIG. 116 (g)) with the end of the stop time, and starts the next decoration special figure variation display game. Further, the first storage display unit 83a of the display device 41 and the first start storage number display unit 86a update the display to show that there is one first start storage, and the special display variation display game by the running storage display unit 84. The information regarding the starting memory which performed B is displayed (t226).

  FIG. 118 (b) shows the case where the effect control device 300 can not receive the stop command for the special figure change display game A in the case of FIG. 118 (a). Until the special figure variation display game A is started (t231) and the identification information is temporarily stopped in all the variation display areas in the first decoration game (t234), it is the same as t221 to t224 in FIG. 118 (a).

  After that, when the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the game control apparatus 100 stops the fluctuation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t235), and displays the result mode over a predetermined stop time (t235-5) t236). Further, with the end of the fluctuation time, a stop command is transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t235). Here, the effect control device 300 can not receive this stop command.

  In the effect control device 300, since the stop command is not received, the fluctuation display of the first decoration game and the second decoration game is continued even if the fluctuation time of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends (t235). In the first decoration game and the second decoration game, the state in which the temporarily stopped identification information is displayed so as to shake is continued (see FIG. 116 (e)).

  When the predetermined stop time is over, the game control apparatus 100 starts the special figure variation display game B which is the next special figure variation display game based on the start memory, and starts the variation display on the special figure 1 display 51 (t236 ). Further, in response to this, a change command forming the start information, a decoration special drawing reserve number command and the like are transmitted to the effect control device 300 (t 236). In the effect control device 300, after receiving the change command which is the start information corresponding to the special game change display game A which is the previous game, the following does not receive the stop command which is the stop information corresponding to the previous game. It is in the state where the start information of the special figure fluctuation display game B which is the game is received.

  Based on the reception of the change command, the effect control device 300 ends the temporarily stopped state in the first decoration game and the second decoration game and displays the result of the outlier as a result of the special figure change display game A for a predetermined time ( t 236 to t 237). Also in this case, a symbol corresponding to the information of the result included in the received information may be displayed corresponding to the special view variable display game A, or a stop prepared in advance for display when the stop command is missed The symbol may be displayed. After that, in the first decoration game and the second decoration game, when the time for displaying the result of the special figure fluctuation display game A ends, the decorative special figure fluctuation display game corresponding to the special figure fluctuation display game B is started (t237 ).

  Further, the game control apparatus 100 updates the display of the special view 1 suspension display 54 controlled by the game control apparatus 100 along with the consumption of the start memory accompanying the start of the special view fluctuation display game B. The displays of the first storage display unit 83a, the first starting storage number display unit 86a, and the storage display unit during execution 84 controlled by the effect control device 300 are updated according to the first decoration game. Here, updating is performed when the variable display of the special-figure variable display game corresponding to the special-figure variable display game B is started (t237).

  As described above, the execution modes of the first decoration game and the second decoration game at the time of dropping the stop command differ depending on whether or not the reach state is reached. If the reach state is not reached as shown in FIG. 117 (b), the next special figure variation display game is started without stopping and displaying the result in the first decoration game, and in the second decoration game for a predetermined time Display the result. If it does not reach the reach state, there is no expectation for the player to be the jackpot for the special feature variable display game, and there is no interest in the result. In addition, the player can be notified of the result sufficiently by temporarily stopping the result in the first decoration game. Therefore, in the first decoration game where it is easy for the player to catch the eye, the interest of the game is reduced by immediately starting the decoration special figure fluctuation display game of the next special figure fluctuation display game in which the player has a sense of expectation. To prevent. Further, by displaying the result for a predetermined time in the second decoration game, the result can be reliably notified to the player who wants to know the determined result, and the player can be prevented from having dissatisfaction.

  On the other hand, when it is in the reach state as shown in FIG. 118 (b), the result is displayed for a predetermined time in the first decoration game and the second decoration game. If the player is in the reach state, the player's sense of expectation for becoming a big hit of the special view variable display game is in a state of increased, and the player is disbelieved by surely notifying that the result is out. I try not to have a feeling.

  The first decoration game is the decoration special view variation display game in the decoration special figure variation display game display unit 85, and the second decoration game is the decoration special view variation display game in the second decoration game display unit 88. The same control as described above may be performed by reversing this.

  If the result is a special result, the same control as in FIG. In addition, when there is no start memory and it becomes a customer waiting state, a state for displaying a result in the first decoration game is maintained for a predetermined period of time from the start of the customer waiting demonstration effect in the customer waiting demonstration effect Since the display of the presentation, etc. is performed, the presentation of the customer waiting demo is started with the reception of the customer waiting demo command, and the result is displayed with a period in which the result of the presentation of the customer waiting demonstration is maintained. Do not provide an additional stop display time.

  From the above, the game control is performed to control the game in the gaming machine that executes the game based on the establishment of the start condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to the player when the result of the game is a special result. Means (game control apparatus 100) and effect control means (effect control apparatus 300) for displaying the first decoration game and the second decoration game corresponding to the game based on the information from the game control means, and predetermined It becomes possible to switch between the state in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized and the state in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are not synchronized based on the establishment of the condition.

  In addition, the predetermined condition for switching between the state in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are synchronized and the state in which the first decoration game and the second decoration game are not synchronized differs depending on the execution mode of the special figure variation display game.

  Further, the game control means is configured to transmit start information to the effect control means at the start of the game, and to transmit stop information to the effect control means at the time of deriving the result of the game, and the effect control means is configured to receive the start information. The first decoration game and the second decoration game are started on the basis, and the result is stopped and displayed in the first decoration game and the second decoration game based on the reception of the stop information, and the start information corresponding to the previous game is received If, after receiving the start information of the next game following the previous game without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game, the predetermined information is received in response to the reception of the start information of the next game. It is possible to stop and display the result of the decoration game corresponding to the result of the previous game in at least one of the decoration games over time, and according to the execution mode of the special figure variation display game, only in one decoration game Game or stops displaying the corresponding results to the results, both the decorative game to stop displaying the result corresponding to the result of the previous game, and thus is a selectable.

  In addition, the gaming machine of the present invention is not limited to the pachinko gaming machine shown in the above embodiment as a gaming machine, and, for example, other pachinko gaming machines, arrange ball gaming machines, ball ball gaming machines, etc. The present invention is applicable to all gaming machines that use the game ball of. Also, the present invention can be applied to a slot machine. The slot machine is not limited to a slot machine using medals, and includes, for example, all slot machines such as slot machines using game balls. In addition, the configurations of the above-described modified examples can be combined appropriately and applied.

  Further, it should be understood that the embodiments disclosed herein are illustrative and non-restrictive in every respect. The scope of the present invention is indicated not by the above description but by the claims, and is intended to include all the modifications within the meaning and scope equivalent to the claims.

100 game control device (game control means)
300 Effect control device (effect control means)

Claims (1)

In a gaming machine that executes a game based on the establishment of a start condition and generates a special gaming state advantageous to a player when the result of the game is a special result,
Game control means for controlling the game;
And an effect control means for displaying a decoration game in which identification information is variably displayed corresponding to the game based on the information from the game control means.
The game control means
At the start of the game, start information including information on the variation time of the decoration game is transmitted to the effect control means.
Stop information is sent to the effect control means when the result of the game is derived, and the standby information is sent to the effect control means when the game can be started but the start condition is not satisfied. Configured to send,
The effect control means is
Starting the decoration game based on the reception of the start information;
Configured to stop and display a result in the decoration game based on the reception of the stop information;
It is configured to set the execution mode of the decoration game so that the identification information is temporarily stopped before the end of the fluctuation time based on the start information.
When the start information of the next game following the previous game is received after the start information corresponding to the previous game is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game, Displaying the result of the decoration game corresponding to the result of the previous game in the decoration game for a predetermined time in response to the reception of the start information of the next game;
In one game, the difference between the fluctuation time of the decoration game corresponding to the game and the time from the start of the decoration game to the state where the identification information is temporarily stopped is twice the predetermined time. The execution mode can be set so that the above time is reached,
When the standby information is received without receiving the stop information corresponding to the previous game after receiving the start information corresponding to the previous game, the decoration game is performed for a predetermined time from the reception of the standby information. A game machine characterized by displaying stop the result of the previous game.

Images